diff options
90 files changed, 2371 insertions, 1036 deletions
diff --git a/runtime/doc/autocmd.txt b/runtime/doc/autocmd.txt index 14d64ed9b..20b5e6a48 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/autocmd.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/autocmd.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*autocmd.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 27 +*autocmd.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 25 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -59,10 +59,10 @@ Note: The ":autocmd" command cannot be followed by another command, since any :au[tocmd] [group] {event} {pat} [nested] {cmd} Add {cmd} to the list of commands that Vim will execute automatically on {event} for a file matching - {pat}. Vim always adds the {cmd} after existing - autocommands, so that the autocommands execute in the - order in which they were given. See |autocmd-nested| - for [nested]. + {pat} |autocmd-patterns|. + Vim always adds the {cmd} after existing autocommands, + so that the autocommands execute in the order in which + they were given. See |autocmd-nested| for [nested]. The special pattern <buffer> or <buffer=N> defines a buffer-local autocommand. See |autocmd-buflocal|. @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ FileChangedShell When Vim notices that the modification time of buffer that was changed "<afile>". NOTE: The commands must not change the current buffer, jump to another buffer or delete a - buffer. *E246* + buffer. *E246* *E811* NOTE: This event never nests, to avoid an endless loop. This means that while executing commands for the FileChangedShell event no @@ -835,9 +835,9 @@ The file pattern {pat} is tested for a match against the file name in one of two ways: 1. When there is no '/' in the pattern, Vim checks for a match against only the tail part of the file name (without its leading directory path). -2. When there is a '/' in the pattern, Vim checks for a match against the - both short file name (as you typed it) and the full file name (after - expanding it to a full path and resolving symbolic links). +2. When there is a '/' in the pattern, Vim checks for a match against both the + short file name (as you typed it) and the full file name (after expanding + it to a full path and resolving symbolic links). The special pattern <buffer> or <buffer=N> is used for buffer-local autocommands |autocmd-buflocal|. This pattern is not matched against the name @@ -1052,7 +1052,7 @@ option will not cause any commands to be executed. *:doautoa* *:doautoall* :doautoa[ll] [group] {event} [fname] Like ":doautocmd", but apply the autocommands to each - loaded buffer. Note that {fname} is used to select + loaded buffer. Note that [fname] is used to select the autocommands, not the buffers to which they are applied. Careful: Don't use this for autocommands that delete a diff --git a/runtime/doc/change.txt b/runtime/doc/change.txt index 440e6b545..f493e10e8 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/change.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/change.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*change.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jul 24 +*change.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 11 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -506,9 +506,9 @@ comment (starting with '"') after the ":!" command. {filter}. Vim replaces the optional bangs with the latest given command and appends the optional [arg]. Vim saves the output of the filter command in a - temporary file and then reads the file into the - buffer. Vim uses the 'shellredir' option to redirect - the filter output to the temporary file. + temporary file and then reads the file into the buffer + |tempfile|. Vim uses the 'shellredir' option to + redirect the filter output to the temporary file. However, if the 'shelltemp' option is off then pipes are used when possible (on Unix). When the 'R' flag is included in 'cpoptions' marks in @@ -524,7 +524,9 @@ comment (starting with '"') after the ":!" command. option is empty (this is the default), use the internal formatting function |C-indenting|. But when 'indentexpr' is not empty, it will be used instead - |indent-expression|. + |indent-expression|. When Vim was compiled without + internal formatting then the "indent" program is used + as a last resort. *==* == Filter [count] lines like with ={motion}. @@ -534,6 +536,22 @@ comment (starting with '"') after the ":!" command. {not in Vi} + *tempfile* *setuid* +Vim uses temporary files for filtering, generating diffs and also for +tempname(). For Unix, the file will be in a private directory (only +accessible by the current user) to avoid security problems (e.g., a symlink +attack or other people reading your file). When Vim exits the directory and +all files in it are deleted. When Vim has the setuid bit set this may cause +problems, the temp file is owned by the setuid user but the filter command +probably runs as the original user. +On MS-DOS and OS/2 the first of these directories that works is used: $TMP, +$TEMP, c:\TMP, c:\TEMP. +For Unix the list of directories is: $TMPDIR, /tmp, current-dir, $HOME. +For MS-Windows the GetTempFileName() system function is used. +For other systems the tmpnam() library function is used. + + + 4.2 Substitute *:substitute* *:s* *:su* :[range]s[ubstitute]/{pattern}/{string}/[flags] [count] @@ -861,7 +879,10 @@ inside of strings can change! Also see 'softtabstop' option. > *:reg* *:registers* :reg[isters] Display the contents of all numbered and named - registers. {not in Vi} + registers. If a register is written to for |:redir| + it will not be listed. + {not in Vi} + :reg[isters] {arg} Display the contents of the numbered and named registers that are mentioned in {arg}. For example: > @@ -994,6 +1015,11 @@ register. With blockwise selection it also depends on the size of the block and whether the corners are on an existing character. (Implementation detail: it actually works by first putting the register after the selection and then deleting the selection.) +The previously selected text is put in the unnamed register. If you want to +put the same text into a Visual selection several times you need to use +another register. E.g., yank the text to copy, Visually select the text to +replace and use "0p . You can repeat this as many times as you like, the +unnamed register will be changed each time. *blockwise-register* If you use a blockwise Visual mode command to get the text into the register, @@ -1031,8 +1057,10 @@ There are nine types of registers: *registers* *E354* Vim fills this register with text deleted with the "d", "c", "s", "x" commands or copied with the yank "y" command, regardless of whether or not a specific register was used (e.g. "xdd). This is like the unnamed register is pointing -to the last used register. An exception is the '_' register: "_dd does not -store the deleted text in any register. +to the last used register. Thus when appending using an uppercase register +name, the unnamed register contains the same text as the named register. +An exception is the '_' register: "_dd does not store the deleted text in any +register. Vim uses the contents of the unnamed register for any put command (p or P) which does not specify a register. Additionally you can access it with the name '"'. This means you have to type two double quotes. Writing to the "" @@ -1098,11 +1126,16 @@ normal command-line editing commands are available, including a special history for expressions. When you end the command-line by typing <CR>, Vim computes the result of the expression. If you end it with <Esc>, Vim abandons the expression. If you do not enter an expression, Vim uses the previous -expression (like with the "/" command). The expression must evaluate to a -string. If the result is a number it's turned into a string. A List, -Dictionary or FuncRef results in an error message (use string() to convert). -If the "= register is used for the "p" command, the string is split up at <NL> -characters. If the string ends in a <NL>, it is regarded as a linewise +expression (like with the "/" command). + +The expression must evaluate to a String. A Number is always automatically +converted to a String. For the "p" and ":put" command, if the result is a +Float it's converted into a String. If the result is a List each element is +turned into a String and used as a line. A Dictionary or FuncRef results in +an error message (use string() to convert). + +If the "= register is used for the "p" command, the String is split up at <NL> +characters. If the String ends in a <NL>, it is regarded as a linewise register. {not in Vi} 7. Selection and drop registers "*, "+ and "~ diff --git a/runtime/doc/cmdline.txt b/runtime/doc/cmdline.txt index c87e61c08..b98ded166 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/cmdline.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/cmdline.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*cmdline.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Sep 18 +*cmdline.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Oct 25 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -118,8 +118,6 @@ CTRL-U Remove all characters between the cursor position and preferred behavior, add the following to your .vimrc: > :cnoremap <C-U> <C-E><C-U> < - Note: if the command-line becomes empty with one of the - delete commands, Command-line mode is quit. *c_<Insert>* <Insert> Toggle between insert and overstrike. {not in Vi} @@ -485,14 +483,14 @@ And this in your .vimrc: > The Ex commands have a few specialties: - *:quote* + *:quote* *:comment* '"' at the start of a line causes the whole line to be ignored. '"' after a command causes the rest of the line to be ignored. This can be used to add comments. Example: > :set ai "set 'autoindent' option It is not possible to add a comment to a shell command ":!cmd" or to the -":map" command and friends, because they see the '"' as part of their -argument. +":map" command and a few others, because they see the '"' as part of their +argument. This is mentioned where the command is explained. *:bar* *:\bar* '|' can be used to separate commands, so you can give multiple commands in one @@ -744,8 +742,8 @@ characters have a special meaning. These can also be used in the expression function expand() |expand()|. % Is replaced with the current file name. *:_%* *c_%* # Is replaced with the alternate file name. *:_#* *c_#* - #n (where n is a number) is replaced with the file name of - buffer n. "#0" is the same as "#". + #n (where n is a number) is replaced with *:_#0* *:_#n* + the file name of buffer n. "#0" is the same as "#". *c_#n* ## Is replaced with all names in the argument list *:_##* *c_##* concatenated, separated by spaces. Each space in a name is preceded with a backslash. @@ -949,7 +947,7 @@ for the file "$home" in the root directory. A few examples: ============================================================================== 6. Command-line window *cmdline-window* *cmdwin* - + *command-line-window* In the command-line window the command line can be edited just like editing text in any window. It is a special kind of window, because you cannot leave it in a normal way. @@ -957,12 +955,12 @@ it in a normal way. feature} -OPEN +OPEN *c_CTRL-F* *q:* *q/* *q?* There are two ways to open the command-line window: 1. From Command-line mode, use the key specified with the 'cedit' option. The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is not set. -2. From Normal mode, use the "q:", "q/" or "q?" command. *q:* *q/* *q?* +2. From Normal mode, use the "q:", "q/" or "q?" command. This starts editing an Ex command-line ("q:") or search string ("q/" or "q?"). Note that this is not possible while recording is in progress (the "q" stops recording then). @@ -992,7 +990,8 @@ nesting. The command-line window is not a normal window. It is not possible to move to another window or edit another buffer. All commands that would do this are disabled in the command-line window. Of course it _is_ possible to execute -any command that you entered in the command-line window. +any command that you entered in the command-line window. Other text edits are +discarded when closing the window. CLOSE *E199* @@ -1027,7 +1026,7 @@ VARIOUS The command-line window cannot be used: - when there already is a command-line window (no nesting) -- for entering a encryption key or when using inputsecret() +- for entering an encryption key or when using inputsecret() - when Vim was not compiled with the +vertsplit feature Some options are set when the command-line window is opened: diff --git a/runtime/doc/debug.txt b/runtime/doc/debug.txt index 44c9f9f1a..654d89b58 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/debug.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/debug.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*debug.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 May 01 +*debug.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Jul 22 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -10,7 +10,8 @@ This is for debugging Vim itself, when it doesn't work properly. For debugging Vim scripts, functions, etc. see |debug-scripts| 1. Location of a crash, using gcc and gdb |debug-gcc| -2. Windows Bug Reporting |debug-win32| +2. Locating memory leaks |debug-leaks| +3. Windows Bug Reporting |debug-win32| ============================================================================== @@ -38,7 +39,25 @@ This also applies when using the MingW tools. ============================================================================== -2. Windows Bug Reporting *debug-win32* +2. Locating memory leaks *debug-leaks* + +If you suspect Vim is leaking memory and you are using Linux, the valgrind +tool is very useful to pinpoint memory leaks. + +First of all, build Vim with EXITFREE defined. Search for this in MAKEFILE +and uncomment the line. + +Use this command to start Vim: *valgrind* +> + valgrind --log-file=valgrind.log ./vim + +Note: Vim will run much slower. If your .vimrc is big or you have several +plugins you need to be patient for startup, or run with the "-u NONE" +argument. + +============================================================================== + +3. Windows Bug Reporting *debug-win32* If the Windows version of Vim crashes in a reproducible manner, you can take some steps to provide a useful bug report. diff --git a/runtime/doc/develop.txt b/runtime/doc/develop.txt index 89cb455e0..dd8031c37 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/develop.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/develop.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*develop.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2007 May 11 +*develop.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Dec 17 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ completely different editor. Extensions are done with a "Vi spirit". hard time finding and remembering them. Keep in mind that more commands and options will be added later. - A feature that people do not know about is a useless feature. Don't add - obscure features, or at least add hints in documentation that they exists. + obscure features, or at least add hints in documentation that they exist. - Minimize using CTRL and other modifiers, they are more difficult to type. - There are many first-time and inexperienced Vim users. Make it easy for them to start using Vim and learn more over time. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Wrong: var=a*5; OK: var = a * 5; In general: Use empty lines to group lines of code together. Put a comment -just above the group of lines. This makes it more easy to quickly see what is +just above the group of lines. This makes it easier to quickly see what is being done. OK: /* Prepare for building the table. */ diff --git a/runtime/doc/diff.txt b/runtime/doc/diff.txt index 3f55c30b6..0775ba2d6 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/diff.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/diff.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*diff.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jul 21 +*diff.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Sep 15 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -64,6 +64,9 @@ In each of the edited files these options are set: These options are set local to the window. When editing another file they are reset to the global value. +The options can still be overruled from a modeline when re-editing the file. +However, 'foldmethod' and 'wrap' won't be set from a modeline when 'diff' is +set. The differences shown are actually the differences in the buffer. Thus if you make changes after loading a file, these will be included in the displayed @@ -91,7 +94,7 @@ While already in Vim you can start diff mode in three ways. :diffthis Make the current window part of the diff windows. This sets the options like for "vimdiff". -:diffpatch {patchfile} *:diffp* *:diffpatch* +:diffpatch {patchfile} *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch* Use the current buffer, patch it with the diff found in {patchfile} and open a buffer on the result. The options are set as for "vimdiff". @@ -121,7 +124,8 @@ file for a moment and come back to the same file and be in diff mode again. *:diffo* *:diffoff* :diffoff Switch off diff mode for the current window. -:diffoff! Switch off diff mode for all windows in the current tab page. +:diffoff! Switch off diff mode for the current window and in all windows + in the current tab page where 'diff' is set. The ":diffoff" command resets the relevant options to their default value. This may be different from what the values were before diff mode was started, @@ -237,7 +241,8 @@ that the buffers will be equal within the specified range. *:diffg* *:diffget* :[range]diffg[et] [bufspec] Modify the current buffer to undo difference with another - buffer. If [bufspec] is given, that buffer is used. + buffer. If [bufspec] is given, that buffer is used. If + [bufspec] refers to the current buffer then nothing happens. Otherwise this only works if there is one other buffer in diff mode. See below for [range]. @@ -323,7 +328,7 @@ The "1a2" item appends the line "bbb". The "4d4" item deletes the line "111". The '7c7" item replaces the line "GGG" with "ggg". -When 'diffexpr' is not empty, Vim evaluates to obtain a diff file in the +When 'diffexpr' is not empty, Vim evaluates it to obtain a diff file in the format mentioned. These variables are set to the file names used: v:fname_in original file @@ -353,7 +358,7 @@ The "-a" argument is used to force comparing the files as text, comparing as binaries isn't useful. The "--binary" argument makes the files read in binary mode, so that a CTRL-Z doesn't end the text on DOS. - *E97* + *E810* *E97* Vim will do a test if the diff output looks alright. If it doesn't, you will get an error message. Possible causes: - The "diff" program cannot be executed. diff --git a/runtime/doc/editing.txt b/runtime/doc/editing.txt index c745f902e..e6b734219 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/editing.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/editing.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*editing.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 09 +*editing.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Jun 10 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the Normal mode. Otherwise same as |:edit|. *:vie* *:view* -:vie[w] [++opt] [+cmd] file +:vie[w][!] [++opt] [+cmd] file When used in Ex mode: Leave |Ex mode|, go back to Normal mode. Otherwise same as |:edit|, but set 'readonly' option for this buffer. {not in Vi} @@ -462,7 +462,10 @@ converted and illegal bytes. It can be one of three things: ++bad=drop Remove the bad characters. The default is like "++bad=?": Replace each bad character with a question -mark. +mark. In some places an inverted question mark is used (0xBF). + +Note that not all commands use the ++bad argument, even though they do not +give an error when you add it. E.g. |:write|. Note that when reading, the 'fileformat' and 'fileencoding' options will be set to the used format. When writing this doesn't happen, thus a next write @@ -837,7 +840,7 @@ USING THE ARGUMENT LIST Example: > :args *.c :argdo set ff=unix | update -This sets the 'fileformat' option to "unix" and writes the file if is now +This sets the 'fileformat' option to "unix" and writes the file if it is now changed. This is done for all *.c files. Example: > @@ -1456,6 +1459,17 @@ If you don't get warned often enough you can use the following command. may be specified by name, number or with a pattern. + *E813* *E814* +Vim will reload the buffer if you chose to. If a window is visible that +contains this buffer, the reloading will happen in the context of this window. +Otherwise a special window is used, so that most autocommands will work. You +can't close this window. A few other restrictions apply. Best is to make +sure nothing happens outside of the current buffer. E.g., setting +window-local options may end up in the wrong window. Splitting the window, +doing something there and closing it should be OK (if there are no side +effects from other autocommands). Closing unrelated windows and buffers will +get you into trouble. + Before writing a file the timestamp is checked. If it has changed, Vim will ask if you really want to overwrite the file: diff --git a/runtime/doc/eval.txt b/runtime/doc/eval.txt index afa38a493..b813706a5 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/eval.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/eval.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*eval.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Nov 27 +*eval.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2010 Jan 05 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -853,7 +853,8 @@ expr8[expr1] item of String or |List| *expr-[]* *E111* If expr8 is a Number or String this results in a String that contains the expr1'th single byte from expr8. expr8 is used as a String, expr1 as a -Number. Note that this doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings. +Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see |byteidx()| for +an alternative. Index zero gives the first character. This is like it works in C. Careful: text column numbers start with one! Example, to get the character under the @@ -878,8 +879,8 @@ expr8[expr1a : expr1b] substring or sublist *expr-[:]* If expr8 is a Number or String this results in the substring with the bytes from expr1a to and including expr1b. expr8 is used as a String, expr1a and -expr1b are used as a Number. Note that this doesn't recognize multi-byte -encodings. +expr1b are used as a Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see +|byteidx()| for computing the indexes. If expr1a is omitted zero is used. If expr1b is omitted the length of the string minus one is used. @@ -895,7 +896,8 @@ Examples: > :let c = name[-2:-2] " last but one byte of a string :let s = line(".")[4:] " from the fifth byte to the end :let s = s[:-3] " remove last two bytes - +< + *sublist* *slice* If expr8 is a |List| this results in a new |List| with the items indicated by the indexes expr1a and expr1b. This works like with a String, as explained just above, except that indexes out of range cause an error. Examples: > @@ -1190,6 +1192,7 @@ They can be used in: Thus not in: - other scripts sourced from this one - mappings +- menus - etc. Script variables can be used to avoid conflicts with global variable names. @@ -1280,7 +1283,8 @@ v:beval_winnr The number of the window, over which the mouse pointer is. Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. *v:char* *char-variable* -v:char Argument for evaluating 'formatexpr'. +v:char Argument for evaluating 'formatexpr' and used for the typed + character when using <expr> in an abbreviation |map-<expr>|. *v:charconvert_from* *charconvert_from-variable* v:charconvert_from @@ -1317,6 +1321,8 @@ v:count The count given for the last Normal mode command. Can be used :map _x :<C-U>echo "the count is " . v:count<CR> < Note: The <C-U> is required to remove the line range that you get when typing ':' after a count. + When there are two counts, as in "3d2w", they are multiplied, + just like what happens in the command, "d6w" for the example. Also used for evaluating the 'formatexpr' option. "count" also works, for backwards compatibility. @@ -1677,9 +1683,9 @@ ceil( {expr}) Float round {expr} up changenr() Number current change number char2nr( {expr}) Number ASCII value of first char in {expr} cindent( {lnum}) Number C indent for line {lnum} -clearmatches() None clear all matches +clearmatches() none clear all matches col( {expr}) Number column nr of cursor or mark -complete({startcol}, {matches}) String set Insert mode completion +complete( {startcol}, {matches}) none set Insert mode completion complete_add( {expr}) Number add completion match complete_check() Number check for key typed during completion confirm( {msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) @@ -1704,7 +1710,7 @@ eval( {string}) any evaluate {string} into its value eventhandler( ) Number TRUE if inside an event handler executable( {expr}) Number 1 if executable {expr} exists exists( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} exists -extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) +extend( {expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1} expand( {expr} [, {flag}]) String expand special keywords in {expr} feedkeys( {string} [, {mode}]) Number add key sequence to typeahead buffer @@ -1746,7 +1752,7 @@ getftime( {fname}) Number last modification time of file getftype( {fname}) String description of type of file {fname} getline( {lnum}) String line {lnum} of current buffer getline( {lnum}, {end}) List lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer -getloclist({nr}) List list of location list items +getloclist( {nr}) List list of location list items getmatches() List list of current matches getpid() Number process ID of Vim getpos( {expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc. @@ -1815,9 +1821,9 @@ matchlist( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) List match and submatches of {pat} in {expr} matchstr( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) String {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr} -max({list}) Number maximum value of items in {list} -min({list}) Number minimum value of items in {list} -mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]]) +max( {list}) Number maximum value of items in {list} +min( {list}) Number minimum value of items in {list} +mkdir( {name} [, {path} [, {prot}]]) Number create directory {name} mode( [expr]) String current editing mode nextnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum} @@ -1829,7 +1835,7 @@ printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...) String format text pumvisible() Number whether popup menu is visible range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) List items from {expr} to {max} -readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]]) +readfile( {fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]]) List get list of lines from file {fname} reltime( [{start} [, {end}]]) List get time value reltimestr( {time}) String turn time value into a String @@ -1850,7 +1856,7 @@ reverse( {list}) List reverse {list} in-place round( {expr}) Float round off {expr} search( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) Number search for {pattern} -searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) +searchdecl( {name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) Number search for variable declaration searchpair( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) Number search for other end of start/end pair @@ -1867,7 +1873,7 @@ setline( {lnum}, {line}) Number set line {lnum} to {line} setloclist( {nr}, {list}[, {action}]) Number modify location list using {list} setmatches( {list}) Number restore a list of matches -setpos( {expr}, {list}) none set the {expr} position to {list} +setpos( {expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list} setqflist( {list}[, {action}]) Number modify quickfix list using {list} setreg( {n}, {v}[, {opt}]) Number set register to value and type settabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window @@ -1905,7 +1911,7 @@ synID( {lnum}, {col}, {trans}) Number syntax ID at {lnum} and {col} synIDattr( {synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) String attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID} synIDtrans( {synID}) Number translated syntax ID of {synID} -synstack({lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col} +synstack( {lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col} system( {expr} [, {input}]) String output of shell command/filter {expr} tabpagebuflist( [{arg}]) List list of buffer numbers in tab page tabpagenr( [{arg}]) Number number of current or last tab page @@ -1929,10 +1935,10 @@ winheight( {nr}) Number height of window {nr} winline() Number window line of the cursor winnr( [{expr}]) Number number of current window winrestcmd() String returns command to restore window sizes -winrestview({dict}) None restore view of current window +winrestview( {dict}) none restore view of current window winsaveview() Dict save view of current window winwidth( {nr}) Number width of window {nr} -writefile({list}, {fname} [, {binary}]) +writefile( {list}, {fname} [, {binary}]) Number write list of lines to file {fname} abs({expr}) *abs()* @@ -2245,7 +2251,7 @@ complete({startcol}, {matches}) *complete()* *E785* {matches} must be a |List|. Each |List| item is one match. See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible. Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid - inserting anything that would completion to stop. + inserting anything that would cause completion to stop. The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with Insert mode completion. The popup menu will appear if specified, see |ins-completion-menu|. @@ -2477,7 +2483,7 @@ empty({expr}) *empty()* Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise. A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any items. A Number is empty when its value is zero. - For a long |List| this is much faster then comparing the + For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the length with zero. escape({string}, {chars}) *escape()* @@ -3053,7 +3059,7 @@ getcharmod() *getcharmod()* 128 Macintosh only: command Only the modifiers that have not been included in the character itself are obtained. Thus Shift-a results in "A" - with no modifier. + without a modifier. getcmdline() *getcmdline()* Return the current command-line. Only works when the command @@ -3181,7 +3187,7 @@ getloclist({nr}) *getloclist()* window {nr}. When {nr} is zero the current window is used. For a location list window, the displayed location list is returned. For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is - returned. Otherwise, same as getqflist(). + returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|. getmatches() *getmatches()* Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined by @@ -3478,7 +3484,9 @@ hostname() *hostname()* iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()* The result is a String, which is the text {expr} converted from encoding {from} to encoding {to}. - When the conversion fails an empty string is returned. + When the conversion completely fails an empty string is + returned. When some characters could not be converted they + are replaced with "?". The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv". Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv| @@ -3503,7 +3511,10 @@ indent({lnum}) The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the index({list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()* Return the lowest index in |List| {list} where the item has a - value equal to {expr}. + value equal to {expr}. There is no automatic conversion, so + the String "4" is different from the Number 4. And the number + 4 is different from the Float 4.0. The value of 'ignorecase' + is not used here, case always matters. If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index {start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end). When {ic} is given and it is non-zero, ignore case. Otherwise @@ -3516,9 +3527,9 @@ index({list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()* input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()* The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on - the command-line. The parameter is either a prompt string, or - a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used in the - prompt to start a new line. + the command-line. The {prompt} argument is either a prompt + string, or a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used + in the prompt to start a new line. The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt. The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same editing commands and mappings. There is a separate history @@ -3528,8 +3539,9 @@ input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()* : echo "Cheers!" :endif < - If the optional {text} is present and not empty, this is used - for the default reply, as if the user typed this. Example: > + If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this + is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this. + Example: > :let color = input("Color? ", "white") < The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of @@ -3559,8 +3571,8 @@ input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()* :endfunction inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) *inputdialog()* - Like input(), but when the GUI is running and text dialogs are - supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text. + Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs + are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text. Example: > :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", &sw) :if n != "" @@ -3581,7 +3593,7 @@ inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()* above the first item a negative number is returned. When clicking on the prompt one more than the length of {textlist} is returned. - Make sure {textlist} has less then 'lines' entries, otherwise + Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise it won't work. It's a good idea to put the entry number at the start of the string. And put a prompt in the first item. Example: > @@ -3589,7 +3601,7 @@ inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()* \ '2. green', '3. blue']) inputrestore() *inputrestore()* - Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous inputsave(). + Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|. Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is called. Calling it more often is harmless though. Returns 1 when there is nothing to restore, 0 otherwise. @@ -3719,14 +3731,14 @@ libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) the DLL is not in the usual places. For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC'). - {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| + {only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| feature is present} Examples: > :echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME") < *libcallnr()* libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) - Just like libcall(), but used for a function that returns an + Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an int instead of a string. {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| feature is present} @@ -3759,7 +3771,7 @@ line({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file < *last-position-jump* This autocommand jumps to the last known position in a file just after opening it, if the '" mark is set: > - :au BufReadPost * if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | exe "normal! g'\"" | endif + :au BufReadPost * if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | exe "normal! g`\"" | endif line2byte({lnum}) *line2byte()* Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line @@ -3990,8 +4002,8 @@ matchdelete({id}) *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803* be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|. matchend({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchend()* - Same as match(), but return the index of first character after - the match. Example: > + Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character + after the match. Example: > :echo matchend("testing", "ing") < results in "7". *strspn()* *strcspn()* @@ -4001,15 +4013,15 @@ matchend({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchend()* :let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]') < Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches. - The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for match(). > + The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2) < results in "7". > :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5) < result is "-1". - When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to match(). + When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|. matchlist({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchlist()* - Same as match(), but return a |List|. The first item in the + Same as |match()|, but return a |List|. The first item in the list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would return. Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc. in |:substitute|. When an optional submatch didn't match an @@ -4023,7 +4035,7 @@ matchstr({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchstr()* :echo matchstr("testing", "ing") < results in "ing". When there is no match "" is returned. - The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for match(). > + The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2) < results in "ing". > :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5) @@ -4497,9 +4509,9 @@ remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) < remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}]) *remove()* Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and - return it. + return the item. With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and - return a list with these items. When {idx} points to the same + return a List with these items. When {idx} points to the same item as {end} a list with one item is returned. When {end} points to an item before {idx} this is an error. See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}. @@ -4750,7 +4762,7 @@ searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} *searchpairpos()* searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) - Same as searchpair(), but returns a |List| with the line and + Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and column position of the match. The first element of the |List| is the line number and the second element is the byte index of the column position of the match. If no match is found, @@ -4870,7 +4882,8 @@ setpos({expr}, {list}) Does not change the jumplist. "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first - column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark. + column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark. If "col" is + smaller than 1 then 1 is used. The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the @@ -4989,7 +5002,7 @@ setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) *setwinvar()* :call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar") shellescape({string} [, {special}]) *shellescape()* - Escape {string} for use as shell command argument. + Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument. On MS-Windows and MS-DOS, when 'shellslash' is not set, it will enclose {string} in double quotes and double all double quotes within {string}. @@ -5051,15 +5064,20 @@ sort({list} [, {func}]) *sort()* *E702* When {func} is given and it is one then case is ignored. When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function is called to compare items. The function is invoked with two - items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 if - the first one sorts after the second one, -1 if the first one - sorts before the second one. Example: > + items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or + bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or + smaller if the first one sorts before the second one. + Example: > func MyCompare(i1, i2) return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1 endfunc let sortedlist = sort(mylist, "MyCompare") +< A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which + ignores overflow: > + func MyCompare(i1, i2) + return a:i1 - a:i2 + endfunc < - *soundfold()* soundfold({word}) Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}. Uses the first @@ -5508,10 +5526,7 @@ tempname() *tempname()* *temp-file-name* is different for at least 26 consecutive calls. Example: > :let tmpfile = tempname() :exe "redir > " . tmpfile -< For Unix, the file will be in a private directory (only - accessible by the current user) to avoid security problems - (e.g., a symlink attack or other people reading your file). - When Vim exits the directory and all files in it are deleted. +< For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|. For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash' option is set or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-'. @@ -6575,15 +6590,19 @@ This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)". removed without effect. Removing any later item means it will not be found. Thus the following example works (an inefficient way to make a list empty): > - :for item in mylist - :call remove(mylist, 0) - :endfor + for item in mylist + call remove(mylist, 0) + endfor < Note that reordering the list (e.g., with sort() or reverse()) may have unexpected effects. Note that the type of each list item should be identical to avoid errors for the type of {var} changing. Unlet the variable at the end of the loop - to allow multiple item types. + to allow multiple item types: > + for item in ["foo", ["bar"]] + echo item + unlet item " E706 without this + endfor :for [{var1}, {var2}, ...] in {listlist} :endfo[r] @@ -6652,7 +6671,7 @@ This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)". :try | edit | catch /^Vim(edit):E\d\+/ | echo "error" | endtry < *:cat* *:catch* *E603* *E604* *E605* -:cat[ch] /{pattern}/ The following commands until the next ":catch", +:cat[ch] /{pattern}/ The following commands until the next |:catch|, |:finally|, or |:endtry| that belongs to the same |:try| as the ":catch" are executed when an exception matching {pattern} is being thrown and has not yet @@ -6825,7 +6844,7 @@ This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)". :execute 'while i < 5 | echo i | let i = i + 1 | endwhile' < - *:comment* + *:exe-comment* ":execute", ":echo" and ":echon" cannot be followed by a comment directly, because they see the '"' as the start of a string. But, you can use '|' followed by a @@ -7831,7 +7850,7 @@ a "E600: Missing :endtry" error message is given, see |except-single-line|. Printing in Binary ~ > - :" The function Nr2Bin() returns the Hex string of a number. + :" The function Nr2Bin() returns the binary string representation of a number. :func Nr2Bin(nr) : let n = a:nr : let r = "" diff --git a/runtime/doc/evim-pl.1 b/runtime/doc/evim-pl.1 index 284b5bcb9..490ee3a7c 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/evim-pl.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/evim-pl.1 @@ -14,11 +14,11 @@ uruchamia .B Vima i ustawia opcje tak by zachowywa si jak edytor bez trybw. To jest cay czas Vim ale uywany jako edytor wska-i-kliknij. -Zachowanie w stlu Notepada dla MS-Windows. +Zachowanie w stylu Notepada dla MS-Windows. .B eVim bdzie zawsze uruchomiony w GUI by wczy menu i pasek narzdzi. .PP -Przeznaczony tylko dla ludzi, ktrzy naprawd nie potrafi pracowa +Przeznaczony tylko dla ludzi, ktrzy naprawd nie mog pracowa z Vimem w normalny sposb. Edycja bdzie o wiele mniej efektywna. .PP .B eview @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ Opcja 'insertmode' jest ustawiona by mona byo od razu wpisywa tekst. .br Mapowania s ustawione tak by Kopiowanie i Wklejanie dziaao -z klawiszami MS-Windows. CTRL-X wycina tekst, CTRL-C kopiuje -a CTRL-V wkleja. Uyj CTRL-Q by uzyska oryginalne znaczenie +z klawiszami MS-Windows. CTRL-X wycina, CTRL-C kopiuje a CTRL-V +wkleja tekst. Uyj CTRL-Q by uzyska oryginalne przeznaczenie CTRL-V. .SH OPCJE Zobacz vim(1). @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Zobacz vim(1). Skrypt uruchamiania dla eVima. .SH ZNANY JAKO Znany jako "Vim dla frajerw". -Jeli uywasz evima oczekuje si, e wyjmiesz chusteczk do nosa, +Jeli uywasz eVima oczekuje si, e wyjmiesz chusteczk do nosa, zrobisz wz w kadym rogu i bdziesz to nosi na gowie. .SH ZOBACZ TAKE vim(1) diff --git a/runtime/doc/evim-pl.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/evim-pl.UTF-8.1 index da940c0a7..096a12add 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/evim-pl.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/evim-pl.UTF-8.1 @@ -14,11 +14,11 @@ uruchamia .B Vima i ustawia opcje tak by zachowywał się jak edytor bez trybów. To jest cały czas Vim ale używany jako edytor wskaż-i-kliknij. -Zachowanie w stlu Notepada dla MS-Windows. +Zachowanie w stylu Notepada dla MS-Windows. .B eVim będzie zawsze uruchomiony w GUI by włączyć menu i pasek narzędzi. .PP -Przeznaczony tylko dla ludzi, którzy naprawdę nie potrafią pracować +Przeznaczony tylko dla ludzi, którzy naprawdę nie mogą pracować z Vimem w normalny sposób. Edycja będzie o wiele mniej efektywna. .PP .B eview @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ Opcja 'insertmode' jest ustawiona by można było od razu wpisywać tekst. .br Mapowania są ustawione tak by Kopiowanie i Wklejanie działało -z klawiszami MS-Windows. CTRL-X wycina tekst, CTRL-C kopiuje -a CTRL-V wkleja. Użyj CTRL-Q by uzyskać oryginalne znaczenie +z klawiszami MS-Windows. CTRL-X wycina, CTRL-C kopiuje a CTRL-V +wkleja tekst. Użyj CTRL-Q by uzyskać oryginalne przeznaczenie CTRL-V. .SH OPCJE Zobacz vim(1). @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Zobacz vim(1). Skrypt uruchamiania dla eVima. .SH ZNANY JAKO Znany jako "Vim dla frajerów". -Jeśli używasz evima oczekuje się, że wyjmiesz chusteczkę do nosa, +Jeśli używasz eVima oczekuje się, że wyjmiesz chusteczkę do nosa, zrobisz węzęł w każdym rogu i będziesz to nosił na głowie. .SH ZOBACZ TAKŻE vim(1) diff --git a/runtime/doc/fold.txt b/runtime/doc/fold.txt index 7c117a8fd..5d465f44f 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/fold.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/fold.txt @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -*fold.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2007 May 11 +*fold.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Dec 22 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar -Folding *Folding* *folding* +Folding *Folding* *folding* *folds* You can find an introduction on folding in chapter 28 of the user manual. |usr_28.txt| diff --git a/runtime/doc/ft_ada.txt b/runtime/doc/ft_ada.txt index 6f328e625..94b5d8e84 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/ft_ada.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/ft_ada.txt @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ The Ada plug-in provides support for: - comment handling (|'comments'|, |'commentstring'|) The plug-in only activates the features of the Ada mode whenever an Ada -files is opened and add adds Ada related entries to the main and pop-up menu. +file is opened and adds Ada related entries to the main and pop-up menu. ============================================================================== 3. Omni Completion ~ @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ support yet. 4. Compiler Support ~ *ada-compiler* -The Ada mode supports more then one Ada compiler and will automatically load the +The Ada mode supports more than one Ada compiler and will automatically load the compiler set in|g:ada_default_compiler|whenever an Ada source is opened. The provided compiler plug-ins are split into the actual compiler plug-in and a collection of support functions and variables. This allows the easy @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ environment. *compiler-gnat* GNAT is the only free (beer and speech) Ada compiler available. There are -several version available which differentiate in the licence terms used. +several versions available which differ in the licence terms used. The GNAT compiler plug-in will perform a compile on pressing <F7> and then immediately shows the result. You can set the project file to be used by @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ setting: > call g:gnat.Set_Project_File ('my_project.gpr') Setting a project file will also create a Vim session (|views-sessions|) so - -like with the GPS - opened files, window positions etc. will remembered +like with the GPS - opened files, window positions etc. will be remembered separately for all projects. *gnat_members* @@ -228,9 +228,9 @@ and HP Ada) is a fairly dated Ada 83 compiler. Support is basic: <F7> will compile the current unit. The Dec Ada compiler expects the package name and not the file name to be -passed a parameter. The compiler plug-in supports the usual file name -convention to convert the file into a unit name. For separates both '-' and -'__' are allowed. +passed as a parameter. The compiler plug-in supports the usual file name +convention to convert the file into a unit name. Both '-' and '__' are allowed +as separators. *decada_members* DEC ADA OBJECT ~ @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ g:decada.Error_Format| string *g:ada_standard_types* g:ada_standard_types bool (true when exists) - Highlight types in package Standard (e.g., "Float") + Highlight types in package Standard (e.g., "Float"). *g:ada_space_errors* *g:ada_no_trail_space_error* @@ -279,13 +279,13 @@ g:ada_space_errors bool (true when exists) *g:ada_line_errors* g:ada_line_errors bool (true when exists) - Highlight lines which are to long. Note: This highlighting + Highlight lines which are too long. Note: This highlighting option is quite CPU intensive. *g:ada_rainbow_color* g:ada_rainbow_color bool (true when exists) Use rainbow colours for '(' and ')'. You need the - rainbow_parenthesis for this to work + rainbow_parenthesis for this to work. *g:ada_folding* g:ada_folding set ('sigpft') @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ g:ada_folding set ('sigpft') *g:ada_abbrev* g:ada_abbrev bool (true when exists) - Add some abbreviations. This feature more or less superseded + Add some abbreviations. This feature is more or less superseded by the various completion methods. *g:ada_withuse_ordinary* @@ -359,12 +359,12 @@ g:ada_with_gnat_project_files bool (true when exists) *g:ada_default_compiler* g:ada_default_compiler string - set default compiler. Currently supported is 'gnat' and + set default compiler. Currently supported are 'gnat' and 'decada'. -An "exists" type is a boolean is considered true when the variable is defined -and false when the variable is undefined. The value which the variable is -set makes no difference. +An "exists" type is a boolean considered true when the variable is defined and +false when the variable is undefined. The value to which the variable is set +makes no difference. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5.3 Commands ~ @@ -372,10 +372,10 @@ set makes no difference. :AdaRainbow *:AdaRainbow* Toggles rainbow colour (|g:ada_rainbow_color|) mode for - '(' and ')' + '(' and ')'. :AdaLines *:AdaLines* - Toggles line error (|g:ada_line_errors|) display + Toggles line error (|g:ada_line_errors|) display. :AdaSpaces *:AdaSpaces* Toggles space error (|g:ada_space_errors|) display. @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ All constants are locked. See |:lockvar| for details. *g:ada#WordRegex* g:ada#WordRegex string - Regular expression to search for Ada words + Regular expression to search for Ada words. *g:ada#DotWordRegex* g:ada#DotWordRegex string @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ g:ada#DotWordRegex string *g:ada#Comment* g:ada#Comment string - Regular expression to search for Ada comments + Regular expression to search for Ada comments. *g:ada#Keywords* g:ada#Keywords list of dictionaries @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ ada#Word([{line}, {col}]) *ada#Word()* ada#List_Tag([{line}, {col}]) *ada#Listtags()* List all occurrences of the Ada entity under the cursor (or at - given line/column) inside the quick-fix window + given line/column) inside the quick-fix window. ada#Jump_Tag ({ident}, {mode}) *ada#Jump_Tag()* List all occurrences of the Ada entity under the cursor (or at @@ -482,8 +482,8 @@ gnat#New () 8. Extra Plugins ~ *ada-extra-plugins* -You can optionally install the following extra plug-in. They work well with Ada -and enhance the ability of the Ada mode.: +You can optionally install the following extra plug-ins. They work well with +Ada and enhance the ability of the Ada mode: backup.vim http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=1537 @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ nerd_comments.vim matchit.vim http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=39 '%' jumping for any language. The normal '%' jump only works for '{}' - style languages. The Ada mode will set the needed search patters. + style languages. The Ada mode will set the needed search patterns. taglist.vim http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=273 diff --git a/runtime/doc/ft_sql.txt b/runtime/doc/ft_sql.txt index 893a9c35e..9b0903e6e 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/ft_sql.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/ft_sql.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*ft_sql.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: Wed Apr 26 2006 3:05:33 PM +*sql.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 03 by David Fishburn @@ -15,7 +15,8 @@ features for navigation, indentation and syntax highlighting. 1.4 Macros |sql-macros| 2. SQL Dialects |sql-dialects| 2.1 SQLSetType |SQLSetType| - 2.2 SQL Dialect Default |sql-type-default| + 2.2 SQLGetType |SQLGetType| + 2.3 SQL Dialect Default |sql-type-default| 3. Adding new SQL Dialects |sql-adding-dialects| 4. OMNI SQL Completion |sql-completion| 4.1 Static mode |sql-completion-static| @@ -204,7 +205,7 @@ Press any of the following keys: > *sqlanywhere* *oracle* *plsql* *sqlj* *sqlserver* - *mysql* *postgres* *psql* + *mysql* *postgress* *psql* *informix* All relational databases support SQL. There is a portion of SQL that is @@ -231,7 +232,7 @@ be nice to specify a default in your |vimrc|. 2.1 SQLSetType *sqlsettype* *SQLSetType* -------------- -For the people that work with many different databases, it would be nice to be +For the people that work with many different databases, it is nice to be able to flip between the various vendors rules (indent, syntax) on a per buffer basis, at any time. The ftplugin/sql.vim file defines this function: > SQLSetType @@ -259,7 +260,17 @@ of available Vim script names: > :SQL<Tab><space><Tab> -2.2 SQL Dialect Default *sql-type-default* +2.2 SQLGetType *sqlgettype* *SQLGetType* +-------------- +At anytime you can determine which SQL dialect you are using by calling the +SQLGetType command. The ftplugin/sql.vim file defines this function: > + SQLGetType + +This will echo: > + Current SQL dialect in use:sqlanywhere + + +2.3 SQL Dialect Default *sql-type-default* ----------------------- As mentioned earlier, the default syntax rules for Vim is based on Oracle (PL/SQL). You can override this default by placing one of the following in @@ -331,6 +342,10 @@ The defaults static maps are: > imap <buffer> <C-C>T <C-\><C-O>:call sqlcomplete#Map('sqlType')<CR><C-X><C-O> imap <buffer> <C-C>s <C-\><C-O>:call sqlcomplete#Map('sqlStatement')<CR><C-X><C-O> +The use of "<C-C>" can be user chosen by using the following in your |.vimrc| as it +may not work properly on all platforms: > + let g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key = '<C-C>' +> The static maps (which are based on the syntax highlight groups) follow this format: > imap <buffer> <C-C>k <C-\><C-O>:call sqlcomplete#Map('sqlKeyword')<CR><C-X><C-O> @@ -406,21 +421,25 @@ to display a list of tables, procedures, views and columns. > To enable the popup, while in INSERT mode, use the following key combinations for each group (where <C-C> means hold the CTRL key down while pressing the space bar): - Table List - <C-C>t - - <C-X><C-O> (the default map assumes tables) - Stored Procedure List - <C-C>p - View List - <C-C>v - Column List - <C-C>c - - Windows platform only - When viewing a popup window displaying the list - of tables, you can press <C-Right>, this will - replace the table currently highlighted with - the column list for that table. - - When viewing a popup window displaying the list - of columns, you can press <C-Left>, this will - replace the column list with the list of tables. - - This allows you to quickly drill down into a - table to view it's columns and back again. + Table List - <C-C>t + - <C-X><C-O> (the default map assumes tables) + Stored Procedure List - <C-C>p + View List - <C-C>v + Column List - <C-C>c + + Drilling In / Out - When viewing a popup window displaying the list + of tables, you can press <Right>, this will + replace the table currently highlighted with + the column list for that table. + - When viewing a popup window displaying the list + of columns, you can press <Left>, this will + replace the column list with the list of tables. + - This allows you to quickly drill down into a + table to view it's columns and back again. + - <Right> and <Left> can be also be chosen via + your |.vimrc| > + let g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right = '<Right>' + let g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left = '<Left>' The SQL completion plugin caches various lists that are displayed in the popup window. This makes the re-displaying of these lists very @@ -498,30 +517,24 @@ beginning with those characters. > The SQL completion plugin can also display a list of columns for particular tables. The column completion is trigger via <C-C>c. -NOTE: The following example uses <C-Right> to trigger a column list while -the popup window is active. This map is only available on the Windows -platforms since *nix does not recognize CTRL and the right arrow held down -together. If you wish to enable this functionality on a *nix platform choose -a key and create one of these mappings (see |sql-completion-maps| for further -details on where to create this imap): > - imap <buffer> <your_keystroke> <C-R>=sqlcomplete#DrillIntoTable()<CR> - imap <buffer> <your_keystroke> <C-Y><C-\><C-O>:call sqlcomplete#Map('column')<CR><C-X><C-O> +NOTE: The following example uses <Right> to trigger a column list while + the popup window is active. Example of using column completion: - Press <C-C>t again to display the list of tables. - - When the list is displayed in the completion window, press <C-Right>, + - When the list is displayed in the completion window, press <Right>, this will replace the list of tables, with a list of columns for the table highlighted (after the same short delay). - - If you press <C-Left>, this will again replace the column list with the + - If you press <Left>, this will again replace the column list with the list of tables. This allows you to drill into tables and column lists very quickly. - - Press <C-Right> again while the same table is highlighted. You will + - Press <Right> again while the same table is highlighted. You will notice there is no delay since the column list has been cached. If you change the schema of a cached table you can press <C-C>R, which clears the SQL completion cache. - - NOTE: <C-Right> and <C-Left> have been designed to work while the + - NOTE: <Right> and <Left> have been designed to work while the completion window is active. If the completion popup window is - not active, a normal <C-Right> or <C-Left> will be executed. + not active, a normal <Right> or <Left> will be executed. Lets look how we can build a SQL statement dynamically. A select statement requires a list of columns. There are two ways to build a column list using @@ -529,7 +542,7 @@ the SQL completion plugin. > One column at a time: < 1. After typing SELECT press <C-C>t to display a list of tables. 2. Choose a table from the list. - 3. Press <C-Right> to display a list of columns. + 3. Press <Right> to display a list of columns. 4. Choose the column from the list and press enter. 5. Enter a "," and press <C-C>c. Generating a column list generally requires having the cursor on a table name. The plugin @@ -632,7 +645,7 @@ your |vimrc|: > - When completing tables, procedure or views and using dbext.vim 3.00 or higher the list of objects will also include the owner name. When completing these objects and omni_sql_include_owner is enabled - the owner name will be replaced. > + the owner name will be be replaced. > omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups < - Default: @@ -684,15 +697,15 @@ plugin. > <C-C>L < - Displays a comma separated list of columns for a specific table. This should only be used when the completion window is active. > - <C-Right> + <Right> < - Displays a list of columns for the table currently highlighted in - the completion window. <C-Right> is not recognized on most Unix + the completion window. <Right> is not recognized on most Unix systems, so this maps is only created on the Windows platform. If you would like the same feature on Unix, choose a different key and make the same map in your vimrc. > - <C-Left> + <Left> < - Displays the list of tables. - <C-Left> is not recognized on most Unix systems, so this maps is + <Left> is not recognized on most Unix systems, so this maps is only created on the Windows platform. If you would like the same feature on Unix, choose a different key and make the same map in your vimrc. > diff --git a/runtime/doc/gui.txt b/runtime/doc/gui.txt index daf1a9a85..09a833b46 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/gui.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/gui.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*gui.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 14 +*gui.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Jan 22 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -35,13 +35,13 @@ GUI version of Vim with: The X11 version of Vim can run both in GUI and in non-GUI mode. See |gui-x11-start|. - *gui-init* *gvimrc* *.gvimrc* *_gvimrc* + *gui-init* *gvimrc* *.gvimrc* *_gvimrc* *$MYGVIMRC* The gvimrc file is where GUI-specific startup commands should be placed. It is always sourced after the |vimrc| file. If you have one then the $MYGVIMRC environment variable has its name. When the GUI starts up initializations are carried out, in this order: -- The 'term' option is set to "builgin_gui" and terminal options are reset to +- The 'term' option is set to "builtin_gui" and terminal options are reset to their default value for the GUI |terminal-options|. - If the system menu file exists, it is sourced. The name of this file is normally "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim". You can check this with ":version". Also @@ -473,9 +473,11 @@ this line to your .vimrc file (NOT your .gvimrc file!): > :let did_install_default_menus = 1 If you also want to avoid the Syntax menu: > :let did_install_syntax_menu = 1 -If you do want the Syntax menu but not all the entries for each available -syntax file (which take quite a bit of time to load): > - :let skip_syntax_sel_menu = 1 +The first item in the Syntax menu can be used to show all available filetypes +in the menu (which can take a bit of time to load). If you want to have all +filetypes already present at startup, add: > + :let do_syntax_sel_menu = 1 + < *console-menus* Although this documentation is in the GUI section, you can actually use menus diff --git a/runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt b/runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt index 8baa075dc..99212ac01 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*gui_x11.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2007 Dec 09 +*gui_x11.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Oct 28 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -540,13 +540,16 @@ Of these three, Vim uses PRIMARY when reading and writing the "* register register. Vim does not access the SECONDARY selection. Examples: (assuming the default option values) -- Select an URL in Visual mode in Vim. Go to a text field in Netscape and - click the middle mouse button. The selected text will be inserted - (hopefully!). -- Select some text in Netscape by dragging with the mouse. Go to Vim and +- Select an URL in Visual mode in Vim. Go to your browser and click the + middle mouse button in the URL text field. The selected text will be + inserted (hopefully!). Note: in Firefox you can set the + middlemouse.contentLoadURL preference to true in about:config, then the + selected URL will be used when pressing middle mouse button in most places + in the window. +- Select some text in your browser by dragging with the mouse. Go to Vim and press the middle mouse button: The selected text is inserted. -- Select some text in Vim and do "+y. Go to Netscape, select some text in a - textfield by dragging with the mouse. Now use the right mouse button and +- Select some text in Vim and do "+y. Go to your browser, select some text in + a textfield by dragging with the mouse. Now use the right mouse button and select "Paste" from the popup menu. The selected text is overwritten by the text from Vim. Note that the text in the "+ register remains available when making a Visual diff --git a/runtime/doc/hangulin.txt b/runtime/doc/hangulin.txt index 2ad19c599..78c00a887 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/hangulin.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/hangulin.txt @@ -1,8 +1,12 @@ -*hangulin.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 02 +*hangulin.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Jun 24 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Chi-Deok Hwang and Sung-Hyun Nam +NOTE: The |+hangul_input| feature is scheduled to be removed. If you want to +keep it, please send a message to the Vim user maillist. + + Introduction *hangul* ------------ It is to input hangul, the Korean language, with VIM GUI version. @@ -96,6 +100,6 @@ Bug or Comment Send comments, patches and suggestions to: Chi-Deok Hwang <hwang@mizi.co.kr> - Nam SungHyun <namsh@kldp.org> + SungHyun Nam <goweol@gmail.com> vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: diff --git a/runtime/doc/help.txt b/runtime/doc/help.txt index 77562f9a1..3ec4ab4e1 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/help.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/help.txt @@ -144,6 +144,7 @@ Special issues ~ |hebrew.txt| Hebrew language support and editing |russian.txt| Russian language support and editing |ft_ada.txt| Ada (the programming language) support +|ft_sql.txt| about the SQL filetype plugin |hangulin.txt| Hangul (Korean) input mode |rileft.txt| right-to-left editing mode diff --git a/runtime/doc/if_ole.txt b/runtime/doc/if_ole.txt index 929fd3928..7df71effb 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/if_ole.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/if_ole.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*if_ole.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2007 May 10 +*if_ole.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 16 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Paul Moore @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Example (Visual Basic syntax) > 3. The "normal" command *ole-normal* Due to the way Vim processes OLE Automation commands, combined with the method -of implementation of the ex command :normal, it is not possible to execute the +of implementation of the Ex command :normal, it is not possible to execute the :normal command via OLE automation. Any attempt to do so will fail, probably harmlessly, although possibly in unpredictable ways. diff --git a/runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt b/runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt index 0e5817b0d..d37e9535e 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*if_pyth.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 30 +*if_pyth.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 16 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Paul Moore @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ module before using it: > Overview > :py print "Hello" # displays a message - :py vim.command(cmd) # execute an ex command + :py vim.command(cmd) # execute an Ex command :py w = vim.windows[n] # gets window "n" :py cw = vim.current.window # gets the current window :py b = vim.buffers[n] # gets buffer "n" diff --git a/runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt b/runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt index 8e1ef35d8..6ccc56824 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*if_ruby.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 30 +*if_ruby.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 16 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Shugo Maeda @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Ruby code gets all of its access to vim via the "VIM" module. Overview > print "Hello" # displays a message - VIM.command(cmd) # execute an ex command + VIM.command(cmd) # execute an Ex command num = VIM::Window.count # gets the number of windows w = VIM::Window[n] # gets window "n" cw = VIM::Window.current # gets the current window diff --git a/runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt b/runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt index d9b6a9c8f..f6aa90d61 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*if_tcl.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 26 +*if_tcl.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 16 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Ingo Wilken @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ The following commands are implemented: > ::vim::beep # Guess. ::vim::buffer {n} # Create Tcl command for one buffer. ::vim::buffer list # Create Tcl commands for all buffers. - ::vim::command [-quiet] {cmd} # Execute an ex command. + ::vim::command [-quiet] {cmd} # Execute an Ex command. ::vim::expr {expr} # Use Vim's expression evaluator. ::vim::option {opt} # Get vim option. ::vim::option {opt} {val} # Set vim option. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Commands: ::vim::command {cmd} *tcl-command* ::vim::command -quiet {cmd} - Execute the vim (ex-mode) command {cmd}. Any ex command that affects + Execute the vim (ex-mode) command {cmd}. Any Ex command that affects a buffer or window uses the current buffer/current window. Does not return a result other than a standard Tcl error code. After this command is completed, the "::vim::current" variable is updated. @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Variables: line *tcl-var-line* lnum *tcl-var-lnum* - These global variables are only available if the ":tcldo" ex command + These global variables are only available if the ":tcldo" Ex command is being executed. They contain the text and line number of the current line. When the Tcl command invoked by ":tcldo" is completed, the current line is set to the contents of the "line" variable, unless @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Let's assume the name of the window command is stored in the Tcl variable "win", i.e. "$win" calls the command. The following options are available: > $win buffer # Create Tcl command for window's buffer. - $win command {cmd} # Execute ex command in windows context. + $win command {cmd} # Execute Ex command in windows context. $win cursor # Get current cursor position. $win cursor {var} # Set cursor position from array variable. $win cursor {row} {col} # Set cursor position. @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ Let's assume the name of the buffer command is stored in the Tcl variable "buf", i.e. "$buf" calls the command. The following options are available: > $buf append {n} {str} # Append a line to buffer, after line {n}. - $buf command {cmd} # Execute ex command in buffers context. + $buf command {cmd} # Execute Ex command in buffers context. $buf count # Report number of lines in buffer. $buf delcmd {cmd} # Call Tcl command when buffer is deleted. $buf delete {n} # Delete a single line. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ used to display messages in vim. ============================================================================== 7. Known bugs & problems *tcl-bugs* -Calling one of the Tcl ex commands from inside Tcl (via "::vim::command") may +Calling one of the Tcl Ex commands from inside Tcl (via "::vim::command") may have unexpected side effects. The command creates a new interpreter, which has the same abilities as the standard interpreter - making "::vim::command" available in a safe child interpreter therefore makes the child unsafe. (It @@ -487,11 +487,11 @@ This script adds a consecutive number to each line in the current range: incr i ; incr n } -The same can also be done quickly with two ex commands, using ":tcldo": +The same can also be done quickly with two Ex commands, using ":tcldo": :tcl set n 1 :[range]tcldo set line "$n\t$line" ; incr n -This procedure runs an ex command on each buffer (idea stolen from Ron Aaron): +This procedure runs an Ex command on each buffer (idea stolen from Ron Aaron): proc eachbuf { cmd } { foreach b [::vim::buffer list] { $b command $cmd @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ This procedure runs an ex command on each buffer (idea stolen from Ron Aaron): Use it like this: :tcl eachbuf %s/foo/bar/g Be careful with Tcl's string and backslash substitution, tough. If in doubt, -surround the ex command with curly braces. +surround the Ex command with curly braces. If you want to add some Tcl procedures permanently to vim, just place them in diff --git a/runtime/doc/indent.txt b/runtime/doc/indent.txt index 4d00da257..9ae52cb4f 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/indent.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/indent.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*indent.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jul 30 +*indent.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 12 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -609,8 +609,9 @@ b:sh_indent_options['continuation-line'] b:sh_indent_options['case-labels'] Amount of indent to add for case labels. + (not actually implemented) -b:sh_indent_options['case-statement'] +b:sh_indent_options['case-statements'] Amount of indent to add for case statements. b:sh_indent_options['case-breaks'] diff --git a/runtime/doc/index.txt b/runtime/doc/index.txt index afe151366..4549300fc 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/index.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/index.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*index.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 May 04 +*index.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Jul 01 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ tag command action in Normal mode ~ |CTRL-W_+| CTRL-W + increase current window height N lines |CTRL-W_-| CTRL-W - decrease current window height N lines |CTRL-W_<| CTRL-W < decrease current window width N columns -|CTRL-W_=| CTRL-W = make all windows the same height +|CTRL-W_=| CTRL-W = make all windows the same height & width |CTRL-W_>| CTRL-W > increase current window width N columns |CTRL-W_H| CTRL-W H move current window to the far left |CTRL-W_J| CTRL-W J move current window to the very bottom @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ tag command action in Normal mode ~ window N lines high |CTRL-W_t| CTRL-W t go to top window |CTRL-W_v| CTRL-W v split current window vertically, new window - N lines wide + N columns wide |CTRL-W_w| CTRL-W w go to N next window (wrap around) |CTRL-W_x| CTRL-W x exchange current window with window N (default: next window) @@ -1339,6 +1339,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name. |:number| :nu[mber] print lines with line number |:nunmap| :nun[map] like ":unmap" but for Normal mode |:nunmenu| :nunme[nu] remove menu for Normal mode +|:oldfiles| :ol[dfiles] list files that have marks in the viminfo file |:open| :o[pen] start open mode (not implemented) |:omap| :om[ap] like ":map" but for Operator-pending mode |:omapclear| :omapc[lear] remove all mappings for Operator-pending mode @@ -1436,7 +1437,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name. |:shell| :sh[ell] escape to a shell |:simalt| :sim[alt] Win32 GUI: simulate Windows ALT key |:sign| :sig[n] manipulate signs -|:silent| :sil[ent] Run a command silently +|:silent| :sil[ent] run a command silently |:sleep| :sl[eep] do nothing for a few seconds |:slast| :sla[st] split window and go to last file in the argument list @@ -1525,6 +1526,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name. |:unlockvar| :unlo[ckvar] unlock variables |:unmap| :unm[ap] remove mapping |:unmenu| :unme[nu] remove menu +|:unsilent| :uns[ilent] run a command not silently |:update| :up[date] write buffer if modified |:vglobal| :v[global] execute commands for not matching lines |:version| :ve[rsion] print version number and other info diff --git a/runtime/doc/insert.txt b/runtime/doc/insert.txt index a7915da9a..61360a4aa 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/insert.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/insert.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*insert.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 21 +*insert.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Jul 14 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -123,6 +123,7 @@ CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+:.-=} *i_CTRL-R* ':' the last command-line '.' the last inserted text '-' the last small (less than a line) delete + *i_CTRL-R_=* '=' the expression register: you are prompted to enter an expression (see |expression|) Note that 0x80 (128 decimal) is used for @@ -133,6 +134,8 @@ CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+:.-=} *i_CTRL-R* When the result is a |List| the items are used as lines. They can have line breaks inside too. + When the result is a Float it's automatically + converted to a String. See |registers| about registers. {not in Vi} CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=} *i_CTRL-R_CTRL-R* @@ -660,7 +663,8 @@ CTRL-X CTRL-L Search backwards for a line that starts with the CTRL-X CTRL-L After expanding a line you can additionally get the line next to it by typing CTRL-X CTRL-L again, unless - a double CTRL-X is used. + a double CTRL-X is used. Only works for loaded + buffers. Completing keywords in current file *compl-current* @@ -1488,7 +1492,7 @@ with data pulled directly from within a database. For detailed instructions and a tutorial see |omni-sql-completion|. The SQL completion plugin can be used in conjunction with other completion -plugins. For example, the PHP filetype has it's own completion plugin. +plugins. For example, the PHP filetype has its own completion plugin. Since PHP is often used to generate dynamic website by accessing a database, the SQL completion plugin can also be enabled. This allows you to complete PHP code and SQL code at the same time. @@ -1725,14 +1729,9 @@ too long when appending characters a line break is automatically inserted. These two commands will keep on asking for lines, until you type a line containing only a ".". Watch out for lines starting with a backslash, see |line-continuation|. -When these commands are used with |:global| or |:vglobal| then the lines are -obtained from the text following the command. Separate lines with a NL -escaped with a backslash: > - :global/abc/insert\ - one line\ - another line -The final "." is not needed then. -NOTE: ":append" and ":insert" don't work properly in between ":if" and + +NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|. +":append" and ":insert" don't work properly in between ":if" and ":endif", ":for" and ":endfor", ":while" and ":endwhile". *:start* *:startinsert* diff --git a/runtime/doc/intro.txt b/runtime/doc/intro.txt index eddd0c54f..68f11b273 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/intro.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/intro.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*intro.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 24 +*intro.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Apr 21 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -43,6 +43,10 @@ between different computers and terminals. Besides the remarks given in this document, there is a separate document for each supported system, see |sys-file-list|. + *pronounce* +Vim is pronounced as one word, like Jim, not vi-ai-em. It's written with a +capital, since it's a name, again like Jim. + This manual is a reference for all the Vim commands and options. This is not an introduction to the use of Vi or Vim, it gets a bit complicated here and there. For beginners, there is a hands-on |tutor|. To learn using Vim, read diff --git a/runtime/doc/map.txt b/runtime/doc/map.txt index e7b93787c..ecc992db4 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/map.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/map.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*map.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 09 +*map.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 04 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -272,9 +272,10 @@ as a special key. 1.3 MAPPING AND MODES *:map-modes* *mapmode-nvo* *mapmode-n* *mapmode-v* *mapmode-o* -There are five sets of mappings +There are six sets of mappings - For Normal mode: When typing commands. - For Visual mode: When typing commands while the Visual area is highlighted. +- For Select mode: like Visual mode but typing text replaces the selection. - For Operator-pending mode: When an operator is pending (after "d", "y", "c", etc.). See below: |omap-info|. - For Insert mode. These are also used in Replace mode. @@ -299,6 +300,9 @@ Overview of which map command works in which mode: Some commands work both in Visual and Select mode, some in only one. Note that quite often "Visual" is mentioned where both Visual and Select mode apply. |Select-mode-mapping| +NOTE: Mapping a printable character in Select mode may confuse the user. It's +better to explicitly use :xmap and :smap for printable characters. Or use +:sunmap after defining the mapping. commands: modes: ~ Visual Select ~ @@ -590,11 +594,14 @@ otherwise you would not be able to use those commands anymore. Here are a few suggestions: - Function keys <F2>, <F3>, etc.. Also the shifted function keys <S-F1>, <S-F2>, etc. Note that <F1> is already used for the help command. -- Meta-keys (with the ALT key pressed). |:map-alt-keys| +- Meta-keys (with the ALT key pressed). Depending on your keybord accented + characters may be used as well. |:map-alt-keys| - Use the '_' or ',' character and then any other character. The "_" and "," commands do exist in Vim (see |_| and |,|), but you probably never use them. - Use a key that is a synonym for another command. For example: CTRL-P and CTRL-N. Use an extra character to allow more mappings. +- The key defined by <Leader> and one or more other keys. This is especially + useful in scripts. |mapleader| See the file "index" for keys that are not used and thus can be mapped without losing any builtin function. You can also use ":help {key}^D" to find out if @@ -1082,7 +1089,7 @@ feature}. It is possible to define your own Ex commands. A user-defined command can act just like a built-in command (it can have a range or arguments, arguments can be completed as filenames or buffer names, etc), except that when the command -is executed, it is transformed into a normal ex command and then executed. +is executed, it is transformed into a normal Ex command and then executed. For starters: See section |40.2| in the user manual. @@ -1150,7 +1157,7 @@ See |:verbose-cmd| for more information. Command attributes -User-defined commands are treated by Vim just like any other ex commands. They +User-defined commands are treated by Vim just like any other Ex commands. They can have arguments, or have a range specified. Arguments are subject to completion as filenames, buffers, etc. Exactly how this works depends upon the command's attributes, which are specified when the command is defined. @@ -1240,7 +1247,7 @@ The function arguments are: CursorPos the cursor position in it (byte index) The function may use these for determining context. For the "custom" argument, it is not necessary to filter candidates against the (implicit -pattern in) ArgLead. Vim will do filter the candidates with its regexp engine +pattern in) ArgLead. Vim will filter the candidates with its regexp engine after function return, and this is probably more efficient in most cases. For the "customlist" argument, Vim will not filter the returned completion candidates and the user supplied function should filter the candidates. @@ -1256,7 +1263,7 @@ the 'path' option: > :com -nargs=1 -bang -complete=customlist,EditFileComplete \ EditFile edit<bang> <args> :fun EditFileComplete(A,L,P) - : return split(globpath(&path, a:ArgLead), "\n") + : return split(globpath(&path, a:A), "\n") :endfun < @@ -1405,7 +1412,7 @@ errors and the "update" command to write modified buffers): > This will invoke: > :call Allargs("%s/foo/bar/ge|update") < -When defining an user command in a script, it will be able to call functions +When defining a user command in a script, it will be able to call functions local to the script and use mappings local to the script. When the user invokes the user command, it will run in the context of the script it was defined in. This matters if |<SID>| is used in a command. diff --git a/runtime/doc/mbyte.txt b/runtime/doc/mbyte.txt index 5b25250f5..164b4b7a6 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/mbyte.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/mbyte.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*mbyte.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 21 +*mbyte.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 17 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar et al. @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ Unfortunately, using fonts in X11 is complicated. The name of a single-byte font is a long string. For multi-byte fonts we need several of these... Note: Most of this is no longer relevant for GTK+ 2. Selecting a font via -its XLFD is not supported anymore; see 'guifont' for an example of how to +its XLFD is not supported; see 'guifont' for an example of how to set the font. Do yourself a favor and ignore the |XLFD| and |xfontset| sections below. @@ -1030,7 +1030,7 @@ For Command-line mode the flag is NOT remembered. You are expected to type an Ex command first, which is ASCII. For typing search patterns the 'imsearch' option is used. It can be set to use the same value as for 'iminsert'. - + *lCursor* It is possible to give the GUI cursor another color when the language mappings are being used. This is disabled by default, to avoid that the cursor becomes invisible when you use a non-standard background color. Here is an example to @@ -1246,21 +1246,37 @@ character sets. Therefore it is possible to write text in any language using Unicode (with a few rarely used languages excluded). And it's mostly possible to mix these languages in one file, which is impossible with other encodings. -Unicode can be encoded in several ways. The two most popular ones are UCS-2, -which uses 16-bit words and UTF-8, which uses one or more bytes for each -character. Vim can support all of these encodings, but always uses UTF-8 +Unicode can be encoded in several ways. The most popular one is UTF-8, which +uses one or more bytes for each character and is backwards compatible with +ASCII. On MS-Windows UTF-16 is also used (previously UCS-2), which uses +16-bit words. Vim can support all of these encodings, but always uses UTF-8 internally. -Vim has comprehensive UTF-8 support. It appears to work in: +Vim has comprehensive UTF-8 support. It works well in: - xterm with utf-8 support enabled - Athena, Motif and GTK GUI - MS-Windows GUI +- several other platforms Double-width characters are supported. This works best with 'guifontwide' or 'guifontset'. When using only 'guifont' the wide characters are drawn in the normal width and a space to fill the gap. Note that the 'guifontset' option is no longer relevant in the GTK+ 2 GUI. + *bom-bytes* +When reading a file a BOM (Byte Order Mark) can be used to recognize the +Unicode encoding: + EF BB BF utf-8 + FF FE utf-16 big endian + FE FF utf-16 little endian + 00 00 FE FF utf-32 big endian + FF FE 00 00 utf-32 little endian + +Utf-8 is the recommended encoding. Note that it's difficult to tell utf-16 +and utf-32 apart. Utf-16 is often used on MS-Windows, utf-32 is not +widespread as file format. + + *mbyte-combining* *mbyte-composing* A composing or combining character is used to change the meaning of the character before it. The combining characters are drawn on top of the @@ -1402,7 +1418,7 @@ options.txt for detailed information. Contributions specifically for the multi-byte features by: Chi-Deok Hwang <hwang@mizi.co.kr> - Nam SungHyun <namsh@kldp.org> + SungHyun Nam <goweol@gmail.com> K.Nagano <nagano@atese.advantest.co.jp> Taro Muraoka <koron@tka.att.ne.jp> Yasuhiro Matsumoto <mattn@mail.goo.ne.jp> diff --git a/runtime/doc/message.txt b/runtime/doc/message.txt index dc772c734..0ac2e9961 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/message.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/message.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*message.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2007 Aug 19 +*message.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Oct 28 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -135,8 +135,8 @@ This means that there are not enough colors available for Vim. It will still run, but some of the colors will not appear in the specified color. Try stopping other applications that use many colors, or start them after starting gvim. -Netscape is known to consume a lot of colors. You can avoid this by telling -it to use its own colormap: > +Browsers are known to consume a lot of colors. You can avoid this with +netscape by telling it to use its own colormap: > netscape -install Or tell it to limit to a certain number of colors (64 should work well): > netscape -ncols 64 @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ allowed for the command that was used. Unable to open swap file for "{filename}", recovery impossible Vim was not able to create a swap file. You can still edit the file, but if -Vim unexpected exits the changes will be lost. And Vim may consume a lot of +Vim unexpectedly exits the changes will be lost. And Vim may consume a lot of memory when editing a big file. You may want to change the 'directory' option to avoid this error. See |swap-file|. @@ -758,9 +758,9 @@ and the screen is about to be redrawn: -> Press 'k', <Up>, 'u', 'b' or 'g' to scroll back in the messages. This works the same way as at the |more-prompt|. Only works when 'compatible' is off and 'more' is on. --> Pressing 'j', 'd' or <Down> is ignored when messages scrolled off the top - of the screen, 'compatible' is off and 'more' is on, to avoid that typing - one 'j' too many causes the messages to disappear. +-> Pressing 'j', 'f', 'd' or <Down> is ignored when messages scrolled off the + top of the screen, 'compatible' is off and 'more' is on, to avoid that + typing one 'j' or 'f' too many causes the messages to disappear. -> Press <C-Y> to copy (yank) a modeless selection to the clipboard register. -> Use a menu. The characters defined for Cmdline-mode are used. -> When 'mouse' contains the 'r' flag, clicking the left mouse button works @@ -795,7 +795,7 @@ group. Type effect ~ <CR> or <NL> or j or <Down> one more line d down a page (half a screen) - <Space> or <PageDown> down a screen + <Space> or f or <PageDown> down a screen G down all the way, until the hit-enter prompt diff --git a/runtime/doc/motion.txt b/runtime/doc/motion.txt index f3364b61f..0b5afe709 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/motion.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/motion.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*motion.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 03 +*motion.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Sep 15 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -151,6 +151,11 @@ CTRL-V When used after an operator, before the motion command: Force ============================================================================== 2. Left-right motions *left-right-motions* +These commands move the cursor to the specified column in the current line. +They stop at the first column and at the end of the line, except "$", which +may move to one of the next lines. See 'whichwrap' option to make some of the +commands move across line boundaries. + h or *h* <Left> or *<Left>* CTRL-H or *CTRL-H* *<BS>* @@ -234,7 +239,7 @@ g$ or g<End> When lines wrap ('wrap' on): To the last character of *bar* | To screen column [count] in the current line. - |exclusive| motion. + |exclusive| motion. Ceci n'est pas une pipe. *f* f{char} To [count]'th occurrence of {char} to the right. The @@ -270,11 +275,6 @@ T{char} Till after [count]'th occurrence of {char} to the , Repeat latest f, t, F or T in opposite direction [count] times. -These commands move the cursor to the specified column in the current line. -They stop at the first column and at the end of the line, except "$", which -may move to one of the next lines. See 'whichwrap' option to make some of the -commands move across line boundaries. - ============================================================================== 3. Up-down motions *up-down-motions* @@ -325,9 +325,9 @@ gg Goto line [count], default first line, on the first non-blank character |linewise|. If 'startofline' not set, keep the same column. -:[range] Set the cursor on the specified line number. If - there are several numbers, the last one is used. - +:[range] Set the cursor on the last line number in [range]. + [range] can also be just one line number, e.g., ":1" + or ":'m". *N%* {count}% Go to {count} percentage in the file, on the first non-blank in the line |linewise|. To compute the new @@ -637,7 +637,8 @@ a` *v_a`* *a`* When the cursor starts on a quote, Vim will figure out which quote pairs form a string by searching from the start of the line. - Any trailing or leading white space is included. + Any trailing white space is included, unless there is + none, then leading white space is included. When used in Visual mode it is made characterwise. Repeating this object in Visual mode another string is included. A count is currently not used. diff --git a/runtime/doc/options.txt b/runtime/doc/options.txt index 84cff6857..e1786133f 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/options.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/options.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*options.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Nov 25 +*options.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2010 Jan 06 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -743,8 +743,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone). b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters - When disabled the character display reverts back to each character's - true stand-alone form. + When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone + form. Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for further details see |arabic.txt|. @@ -813,11 +813,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not change. *g:colors_name* - When a color scheme is loaded (the "colors_name" variable is set) + When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set) setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work. However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may - be undone. First delete the "colors_name" variable when needed. + be undone. First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed. When setting 'background' to the default value with: > :set background& @@ -959,7 +959,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. {not in Vi} List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas. - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list - where this is possible. + where this is possible. The directory must exist, Vim will not + create it for you. - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is impossible!). Writing may fail because of this. - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory @@ -1143,7 +1144,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file. Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2 - appear halfway the resulting file. + appear halfway the resulting file. Gcc doesn't accept a BOM. When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly. Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you @@ -1759,8 +1760,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment - variable exists |posix|. This means tries to behave like the POSIX - specification. + variable exists |posix|. This means Vim tries to behave like the + POSIX specification. contains behavior ~ *cpo-a* @@ -2386,6 +2387,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'. + If you need to know whether 'encoding' is a multi-byte encoding, you + can use: > + if has("multi_byte_encoding") +< Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be @@ -2446,6 +2451,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected. Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting 'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively. + If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are + currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in + the future). *'equalprg'* *'ep'* 'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "") @@ -2453,7 +2461,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. {not in Vi} External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent' - or 'indentexpr'. + or 'indentexpr'. When Vim was compiled without internal formatting, + the "indent" program is used. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for @@ -2550,13 +2559,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. {not in Vi} Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer. When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be - done when reading and writing the file. + done when writing the file. For reading see below. When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be used (no conversion when reading or writing a file). + Conversion will also be done when 'encoding' and 'fileencoding' are + both a Unicode encoding and 'fileencoding' is not utf-8. That's + because internally Unicode is always stored as utf-8. WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When - 'encoding' is "utf-8" conversion is most likely done in a way - that the reverse conversion results in the same text. When - 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some characters may be lost! + 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding, conversion + is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion + results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some + characters may be lost! See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be specified that can be handled by the converter, see |mbyte-conversion|. @@ -2843,6 +2856,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |sandbox-option|. + This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is + on. It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|. @@ -3235,7 +3250,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim will try to find the related bold and italic fonts. - For Win32, GTK, Mac OS and Photon: > + For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon: > :set guifont=* < will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want. @@ -3244,8 +3259,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: > :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11 -< That's all. XLFDs are no longer accepted. - +< That's all. XLFDs are not used. For Chinese this is reported to work + well: > + if has("gui_gtk2") + set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12 + set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12 + endif +< For Mac OSX you can use something like this: > :set guifont=Monaco:h10 < Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems. @@ -3491,7 +3511,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab pages line. When empty Vim will use a default tooltip. This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above. - + You can include a line break. Simplest method is to use |:let|: > + :let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two" +< *'helpfile'* *'hf'* 'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt" @@ -3776,7 +3798,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented characters with dead keys. - *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'nodisable'* *'noimd'* + *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'noimdisable'* *'noimd'* 'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI)) global {not in Vi} @@ -4092,8 +4114,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte. When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are displayed as <xx>. - The NonText highlighting will be used for unprintable characters. - |hl-NonText| + The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters. + |hl-SpecialKey| Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character @@ -4330,10 +4352,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. *'list'* *'nolist'* 'list' boolean (default off) local to window - List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I, show end of line with $. Useful to - see the difference between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks. - Note that this will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' or - 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for + List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I is displayed, display $ after end of + line. Useful to see the difference between tabs and spaces and for + trailing blanks. Further changed by the 'listchars' option. + + The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character + occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode. To get this cursor + position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: > + :set list lcs=tab\ \ +< + Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' + or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for changing the way tabs are displayed. *'listchars'* *'lcs'* @@ -4516,15 +4545,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. {not in Vi} Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause - other memory to be freed. Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work - without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'. + other memory to be freed. The maximum usable value is about 2000000. + Use this to work without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'. *'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'* 'maxmempattern' 'mmp' number (default 1000) global {not in Vi} Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching. - Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. + The maximum value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. *E363* When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly behaves like CTRL-C was typed. @@ -4539,9 +4568,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. available) global {not in Vi} - Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for all buffers together. - Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. Also see - 'maxmem'. + Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together. + The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte). Use this to work + without a limit. On 64 bit machines higher values might work. But + hey, do you really need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing? + Also see 'maxmem'. *'menuitems'* *'mis'* 'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25) @@ -5607,8 +5638,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. winsize window sizes Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". - When "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored with - absolute paths. + When neither "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored + with absolute paths. "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. @@ -5884,8 +5915,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| feature} String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful - values are "> " or "+++ ". - Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and + values are "> " or "+++ ": > + :set showbreak=>\ +< Note the backslash to escape the trailing space. It's easier like + this: > + :let &showbreak = '+++ ' +< Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line). The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in @@ -5906,7 +5941,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown: - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters. - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines. - - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: linesxcolumns. + - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: + {lines}x{columns}. NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. @@ -6641,8 +6677,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version - 5.3 or higher the -f or --fold-case-sort switch can be used for this - as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work. + 5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used + for this as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this + to work. When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags @@ -7252,9 +7289,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528* 'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS, - Windows and OS/2: '20,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:, - for Amiga: '20,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2: - for others: '20,<50,s10,h) + Windows and OS/2: '100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:, + for Amiga: '100,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2: + for others: '100,<50,s10,h) global {not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| @@ -7727,6 +7764,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. :set sidescroll=5 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:> < See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|. + This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is + on. *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'* 'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0) diff --git a/runtime/doc/os_390.txt b/runtime/doc/os_390.txt index 04ca16aff..f06163879 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/os_390.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/os_390.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*os_390.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2005 Mar 29 +*os_390.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Dec 17 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Ralf Schandl @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ not an exhaustive summary of all the modifications made to the code base. 5.6-390c: I grepped through the source and examined every spot with a character - involved in a operation (+-). I hope I now found all EBCDIC/ASCII + involved in an operation (+-). I hope I now found all EBCDIC/ASCII stuff, but .... Fixed: @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ not an exhaustive summary of all the modifications made to the code base. - added special compiler and linker options if building with X11 - configure: - after created via autoconf hand-edited it to make the test for - ICEConnectionNumber work. This is a autoconf problem. OS/390 UNIX + ICEConnectionNumber work. This is an autoconf problem. OS/390 UNIX needs -lX11 for this. - Makefile - Don't include the lib directories ('-L...') into the variable diff --git a/runtime/doc/os_vms.txt b/runtime/doc/os_vms.txt index 0d7590628..39efcf646 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/os_vms.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/os_vms.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*os_vms.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 19 +*os_vms.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Oct 28 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL @@ -139,9 +139,9 @@ Use: > define/nolog VIMRUNTIME device:[path.vim.vim60] define/nolog TMP device:[path.tmp] -to get vim.exe to find its document, filetype, and syntax files, and to +To get vim.exe to find its document, filetype, and syntax files, and to specify a directory where temporary files will be located. Copy the "runtime" -subdirectory of the vim distribution to vimruntime. +subdirectory of the Vim distribution to vimruntime. Logicals $VIMRUNTIME and $TMP are optional. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ You just have to define the "whole" path: > $ define VIM "<server_name>[""user password""]::device:<path>" $ vi*m :== "mcr VIM:VIM.EXE" -as for example: > +As for example: > $ define VIM "PLUTO::RF10:[UTIL.VIM]" $ define VIM "PLUTO""ZAY mypass""::RF10:[UTIL.VIM]" ! if passwd required @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ then add to the SYS$STARTUP:SYLOGICALS.COM > $ define/nolog/sys VIM device:<path> $ define/nolog/sys TMP SYS$SCRATCH -and to the SYS$STARTUP:SYLOGIN.COM > +And to the SYS$STARTUP:SYLOGIN.COM > $ vi*m :== mcr VIM:VIM.EXE $ gv*im:== spawn/nowait/input=NLA0 mcr VIM:VIM.EXE -g -GEOMETRY 80x40 @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ It is possible to use Vim as an internode editor. vi "<server>""username passwd""::<device>:<path><filename>;<version>" -example: > +Example: > vi "pluto""zay passwd""::RF10:<USER.ZAY.WORK>TEST.C;1" Note: syntax is very important, otherwise VMS will recognize more parameters @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ and run the command procedure below: > $ end: Note: Never use it in a clustered environment (you do not need it), loading -could be very-very slow, but even faster then a local Emacs. :-) +could be very-very slow, but even faster than a local Emacs. :-) (Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 5.6) @@ -575,12 +575,12 @@ boxes that is meant to solve GNU problems on OpenVMS. 8.12 diff-mode -Vim 6.0 and higher supports vim diff-mode (See |new-diff-mode|, |diff-mode| +Vim 6.0 and higher supports Vim diff-mode (See |new-diff-mode|, |diff-mode| and |08.7|). This uses the external program 'diff' and expects a Unix-like output format from diff. The standard VMS diff has a different output -format. To use vim on VMS in diff-mode, you need to: +format. To use Vim on VMS in diff-mode, you need to: 1 Install a Unix-like diff program, e.g. GNU diff - 2 Tell vim to use the Unix-like diff for diff-mode. + 2 Tell Vim to use the Unix-like diff for diff-mode. You can download GNU diff from the VIM-VMS website, it is one of the GNU tools in http://www.polarhome.com/vim/files/gnu_tools.zip. I suggest to @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ prompt: > GDIFF :== $GNU:DIFF.EXE -Now you need to tell vim to use the new diff program. Take the example +Now you need to tell Vim to use the new diff program. Take the example settings from |diff-diffexpr| and change the call to the external diff program to the new diff on VMS. Add this to your .vimrc file: > @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ program to the new diff on VMS. Add this to your .vimrc file: > endfunction endif -You can now use vim in diff-mode, e.g. to compare two files in read-only +You can now use Vim in diff-mode, e.g. to compare two files in read-only mode: > $ VIM -D/R <FILE1> <FILE2> @@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ You can now compare files in 4 ways: > 8.13 Allow '$' in C keywords DEC C uses many identifiers with '$' in them. This is not allowed in ANSI C, -and vim recognises the '$' as the end of the identifier. You can change this +and Vim recognises the '$' as the end of the identifier. You can change this with the |iskeyword|command. Add this command to your .vimrc file: > @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ start it with: > 8.14 Slow start in console mode issue -As GUI/GTK Vim works equally well in console mode, many administartors +As GUI/GTK Vim works equally well in console mode, many administrators deploy those executables system wide. Unfortunately, on a remote slow connections GUI/GTK executables behave rather slow when user wants to run Vim just in the console mode - because of X environment detection timeout. @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ both GUI/GTK build and just console build executables, like below: > |----- syntax vimrc (system rc files) gvimrc - gvim.exe (the remaned GUI or GTK built vim.exe) + gvim.exe (the renamed GUI or GTK built vim.exe) vim.exe (the console only executable) Define system symbols like below in for ex in LOGIN.COM or SYLOGIN.COM: > @@ -713,11 +713,11 @@ View of Cluster from system ID 11655 node: TOR ODIN VMS V7.3-2 MEMBER +---------------------------------+ -It is convinient to have a common VIM directory but execute different +It is convenient to have a common VIM directory but execute different executables. There are more solutions for this problem: -solution 1. all executables in the same directory with different names +Solution 1. All executables in the same directory with different names This is easily done with the following script that can be added to the login.com or sylogin.com: > @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ to the login.com or sylogin.com: > $ vi*m :== mcr vim:VIM.EXE_IA64 $ endif -solution 2. different directories: > +Solution 2. Different directories: > $ if f$getsyi("NODE_HWTYPE") .eqs. "VAX" $ then @@ -757,8 +757,8 @@ solution 2. different directories: > $! VIMRUNTIME must be defined in order to find runtime files $ define/nolog VIMRUNTIME RF10:[UTIL.VIM72] -A good examle for this approach is the [GNU]gnu_tools.com script from GNU_TOOLS.ZIP -package downloadable from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/ +A good example for this approach is the [GNU]gnu_tools.com script from +GNU_TOOLS.ZIP package downloadable from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/ (Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 7.2) diff --git a/runtime/doc/pattern.txt b/runtime/doc/pattern.txt index 77a450552..56341c915 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/pattern.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/pattern.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*pattern.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jul 16 +*pattern.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Nov 18 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -32,12 +32,13 @@ explanations are in chapter 27 |usr_27.txt|. |linewise|. */<CR>* -/<CR> Search forward for the [count]'th latest used - pattern |last-pattern| with latest used |{offset}|. +/<CR> Search forward for the [count]'th occurrence of the + latest used pattern |last-pattern| with latest used + |{offset}|. -//{offset}<CR> Search forward for the [count]'th latest used - pattern |last-pattern| with new |{offset}|. If - {offset} is empty no offset is used. +//{offset}<CR> Search forward for the [count]'th occurrence of the + latest used pattern |last-pattern| with new + |{offset}|. If {offset} is empty no offset is used. *?* ?{pattern}[?]<CR> Search backward for the [count]'th previous @@ -48,12 +49,13 @@ explanations are in chapter 27 |usr_27.txt|. down |linewise|. *?<CR>* -?<CR> Search backward for the [count]'th latest used - pattern |last-pattern| with latest used |{offset}|. +?<CR> Search backward for the [count]'th occurrence of the + latest used pattern |last-pattern| with latest used + |{offset}|. -??{offset}<CR> Search backward for the [count]'th latest used - pattern |last-pattern| with new |{offset}|. If - {offset} is empty no offset is used. +??{offset}<CR> Search backward for the [count]'th occurrence of the + latest used pattern |last-pattern| with new + |{offset}|. If {offset} is empty no offset is used. *n* n Repeat the latest "/" or "?" [count] times. @@ -507,7 +509,7 @@ Character classes {not in Vi}: */character-classes* |/\Z| \Z \Z ignore differences in Unicode "combining characters". Useful when searching voweled Hebrew or Arabic text. -|/\%d| \%d \%d match specified decimal character (eg \%d123 +|/\%d| \%d \%d match specified decimal character (eg \%d123) |/\%x| \%x \%x match specified hex character (eg \%x2a) |/\%o| \%o \%o match specified octal character (eg \%o040) |/\%u| \%u \%u match specified multibyte character (eg \%u20ac) @@ -794,7 +796,11 @@ $ At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on): */\%V* \%V Match inside the Visual area. When Visual mode has already been stopped match in the area that |gv| would reselect. - Only works for the current buffer. + This is a |/zero-width| match. To make sure the whole pattern is + inside the Visual area put it at the start and end of the pattern, + e.g.: > + /\%Vfoo.*bar\%V +< Only works for the current buffer. */\%#* *cursor-position* \%# Matches with the cursor position. Only works when matching in a @@ -877,10 +883,13 @@ $ At end of pattern or in front of "\|", "\)" or "\n" ('magic' on): this will clearly show when the match is updated or not. To match the text up to column 17: > /.*\%17v -< Column 17 is not included, because that's where the "\%17v" matches, - and since this is a |/zero-width| match, column 17 isn't included in - the match. This does the same: > - /.*\%<18v +< Column 17 is included, because that's where the "\%17v" matches, + even though this is a |/zero-width| match. Adding a dot to match the + next character has the same result: > + /.*\%17v. +< This command does the same thing, but also matches when there is no + character in column 17: > + /.*\%<18v. < Character classes: {not in Vi} diff --git a/runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt b/runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt index 3ac15692b..1ea67c2b1 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -*pi_getscript.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 29 +*pi_getscript.txt* For Vim version 7.0. Last change: 2009 Oct 14 > GETSCRIPT REFERENCE MANUAL by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. < Authors: Charles E. Campbell, Jr. <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamilyA.Mbiz> (remove NOSPAM from the email address) *GetLatestVimScripts-copyright* -Copyright: (c) 2004-2006 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *glvs-copyright* +Copyright: (c) 2004-2009 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *glvs-copyright* The VIM LICENSE applies to getscript.vim and pi_getscript.txt (see |copyright|) except use "getscript" instead of "Vim". No warranty, express or implied. @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ The GetLatestVimScripts.dist file serves as an example and a template for your own personal list. Feel free to remove all the scripts mentioned within it; the "important" part of it is the first two lines. -Your computer needs to have wget for GetLatestVimScripts to do its work. +Your computer needs to have wget or curl for GetLatestVimScripts to do its work. 1. if compressed: gunzip getscript.vba.gz 2. Unix: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Your computer needs to have wget for GetLatestVimScripts to do its work. ============================================================================== 3. GetLatestVimScripts Usage *glvs-usage* *:GLVS* -Unless its been defined elsewhere, > +Unless it has been defined elsewhere, > :GLVS will invoke GetLatestVimScripts(). If some other plugin has defined that command, then you may type @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ insures that GetLatestVimScripts will assume that the script it has is out-of-date. The SourceID is extracted by GetLatestVimScripts from the script's page on -vim.sf.net; whenever its greater than the one stored in the +vim.sf.net; whenever it is greater than the one stored in the GetLatestVimScripts.dat file, the script will be downloaded (see |GetLatestVimScripts_dat|). @@ -176,6 +176,8 @@ Note: the first two lines are required, but essentially act as comments. ============================================================================== 5. GetLatestVimScripts Friendly Plugins *getscript-plugins* *glvs-plugins* + (this section is for plugin authors)~ + If a plugin author includes the following comment anywhere in their plugin, GetLatestVimScripts will find it and use it to automatically build the user's GetLatestVimScripts.dat files: @@ -191,11 +193,20 @@ plus any additional lines describing any plugin dependencies it may have. Same format, of course! If your command is auto-installable (see |glvs-autoinstall|), and most scripts -are, then you may include :AutoInstall: at the start of "yourscriptname". +are, then you may include :AutoInstall: just before "yourscriptname": +> + src_id + v + " GetLatestVimScripts: ### ### :AutoInstall: yourscriptname + ^ + scriptid +< +NOTE: :AutoInstall: is a plugin-author option, not a GetLatestVimScripts.dat~ + entry!~ GetLatestVimScripts commands for those scripts are then appended, if not -already present, to the user's GetLatest/GetLatestVimScripts.dat file. Its a -relatively painless way to automate the acquisition of any scripts your +already present, to the user's GetLatest/GetLatestVimScripts.dat file. It is +a relatively painless way to automate the acquisition of any scripts your plugins depend upon. Now, as an author, you probably don't want GetLatestVimScripts to download @@ -290,14 +301,19 @@ after/syntax/c.vim contained in it to overwrite a user's c.vim. This variable holds the options to be used with the g:GetLatestVimScripts_wget command. > - g:getLatestVimScripts_allowautoinstall + g:GetLatestVimScripts_allowautoinstall < default= 1 This variable indicates whether GetLatestVimScripts is allowed - to attempt to automatically install scripts. Note that it - doesn't understand vimballs (yet). Furthermore, the plugin - author has to have explicitly indicated that his/her plugin - is automatically installable. - + to attempt to automatically install scripts. Furthermore, the + plugin author has to have explicitly indicated that his/her + plugin is automatically installable (via the :AutoInstall: + keyword in the GetLatestVimScripts comment line). +> + g:GetLatestVimScripts_autoinstalldir +< default= $HOME/.vim (linux) + default= $HOME/vimfiles (windows) + Override where :AutoInstall: scripts will be installed. + Doesn't override vimball installation. ============================================================================== 8. GetLatestVimScripts Algorithm *glvs-algorithm* *glvs-alg* @@ -336,8 +352,10 @@ The AutoInstall process will: 9. GetLatestVimScripts History *getscript-history* *glvs-hist* {{{1 v31 Jun 29, 2008 : * (Bill McCarthy) fixed having hls enabled with getscript + * (David Schaefer) the acd option interferes with vimballs + Solution: bypass the acd option v30 Jun 13, 2008 : * GLVS now checks for existence of fnameescape() and will - issue an error message if its not supported + issue an error message if it is not supported v29 Jan 07, 2008 : * Bram M pointed out that cpo is a global option and that getscriptPlugin.vim was setting it but not restoring it. v28 Jan 02, 2008 : * improved shell quoting character handling, cygwin diff --git a/runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt b/runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt index aefe987ad..7635af288 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt @@ -1,8 +1,22 @@ -*pi_netrw.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 08 +*pi_netrw.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Dec 28 ----------------------------------------------------- NETRW REFERENCE MANUAL by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. ----------------------------------------------------- +Author: Charles E. Campbell, Jr. <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM> + (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first) + +Copyright: Copyright (C) 2009 Charles E Campbell, Jr *netrw-copyright* + Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code, with + or without modifications, provided that this copyright notice is + copied with it. Like anything else that's free, netrw.vim, + netrwPlugin.vim, netrwFileHandlers.vim, netrwSettings.vim, + syntax/netrw.vim, and pi_netrw.txt are provided *as is* and comes + with no warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied. No + guarantees of merchantability. No guarantees of suitability for + any purpose. By using this plugin, you agree that in no event will + the copyright holder be liable for any damages resulting from the + use of this software. *dav* *ftp* *netrw-file* *Nread* *rcp* *scp* @@ -18,6 +32,7 @@ EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS AND PROTOCOLS................|netrw-externapp| READING............................................|netrw-read| WRITING............................................|netrw-write| + SOURCING...........................................|netrw-source| DIRECTORY LISTING..................................|netrw-dirlist| CHANGING THE USERID AND PASSWORD...................|netrw-chgup| VARIABLES AND SETTINGS.............................|netrw-variables| @@ -38,11 +53,12 @@ Browsing With A Horizontally Split Window..........|netrw-o| Browsing With A New Tab............................|netrw-t| Browsing With A Vertically Split Window............|netrw-v| - Change Listing Style...............................|netrw-i| + Change Listing Style.(thin wide long tree).........|netrw-i| Changing To A Bookmarked Directory.................|netrw-gb| Changing To A Predecessor Directory................|netrw-u| Changing To A Successor Directory..................|netrw-U| Customizing Browsing With A User Function..........|netrw-x| + Deleting Bookmarks.................................|netrw-mB| Deleting Files Or Directories......................|netrw-D| Directory Exploring Commands.......................|netrw-explore| Exploring With Stars and Patterns..................|netrw-star| @@ -80,10 +96,12 @@ Renaming Files Or Directories......................|netrw-move| Reversing Sorting Order............................|netrw-r| Selecting Sorting Style............................|netrw-s| + Setting Editing Window.............................|netrw-C| 10. Problems and Fixes...................................|netrw-problems| 11. Debugging Netrw Itself...............................|netrw-debug| 12. History..............................................|netrw-history| -13. Credits..............................................|netrw-credits| +13. Todo.................................................|netrw-todo| +14. Credits..............................................|netrw-credits| {Vi does not have any of this} @@ -91,7 +109,7 @@ 2. Starting With Netrw *netrw-start* {{{1 Netrw makes reading files, writing files, browsing over a network, and -browsing locally easy! First, make sure that you have plugins enabled, so +local browsing easy! First, make sure that you have plugins enabled, so you'll need to have at least the following in your <.vimrc>: (or see |netrw-activate|) > @@ -136,8 +154,11 @@ the directory name is followed by a "/"): > < See |netrw-browse| for more! -There are more protocols supported by netrw just than scp and ftp, too: see the -next section, |netrw-externapp|, for how to use these external applications. +There are more protocols supported by netrw than just scp and ftp, too: see the +next section, |netrw-externapp|, on how to use these external applications with +netrw and vim. + +PREVENTING LOADING If you want to use plugins, but for some reason don't wish to use netrw, then you need to avoid loading both the plugin and the autoload portions of netrw. @@ -150,7 +171,7 @@ You may do so by placing the following two lines in your <.vimrc>: > ============================================================================== 3. Netrw Reference *netrw-ref* {{{1 - Netrw supports several protocols in addition to scp and ftp mentioned + Netrw supports several protocols in addition to scp and ftp as mentioned in |netrw-start|. These include dav, fetch, http,... well, just look at the list in |netrw-externapp|. Each protocol is associated with a variable which holds the default command supporting that protocol. @@ -159,16 +180,35 @@ EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS AND PROTOCOLS *netrw-externapp* {{{2 Protocol Variable Default Value -------- ---------------- ------------- - dav: *g:netrw_dav_cmd* = "cadaver" - fetch: *g:netrw_fetch_cmd* = "fetch -o" if fetch is available - ftp: *g:netrw_ftp_cmd* = "ftp" - http: *g:netrw_http_cmd* = "curl -o" if curl is available - http: g:netrw_http_cmd = "wget -q -O" elseif wget is available - http: g:netrw_http_cmd = "fetch -o" elseif fetch is available - rcp: *g:netrw_rcp_cmd* = "rcp" - rsync: *g:netrw_rsync_cmd* = "rsync -a" - scp: *g:netrw_scp_cmd* = "scp -q" - sftp: *g:netrw_sftp_cmd* = "sftp" + dav: *g:netrw_dav_cmd* = "cadaver" if cadaver is executable + dav: g:netrw_dav_cmd = "curl -o" elseif curl is available + fetch: *g:netrw_fetch_cmd* = "fetch -o" if fetch is available + ftp: *g:netrw_ftp_cmd* = "ftp" + http: *g:netrw_http_cmd* = "elinks" if elinks is available + http: g:netrw_http_cmd = "links" elseif links is available + http: g:netrw_http_cmd = "curl" elseif curl is available + http: g:netrw_http_cmd = "wget" elseif wget is available + http: g:netrw_http_cmd = "fetch" elseif fetch is available + rcp: *g:netrw_rcp_cmd* = "rcp" + rsync: *g:netrw_rsync_cmd* = "rsync -a" + scp: *g:netrw_scp_cmd* = "scp -q" + sftp: *g:netrw_sftp_cmd* = "sftp" + + *g:netrw_http_xcmd* : the option string for http://... protocols are + specified via this variable and may be independently overridden. By + default, the option arguments for the http-handling commands are: > + + elinks : "-source >" + links : "-source >" + curl : "-o" + wget : "-q -O" + fetch : "-o" +< + For example, if your system has elinks, and you'd rather see the + page using an attempt at rendering the text, you may wish to have > + let g:netrw_http_xcmd= "-dump >" +< in your .vimrc. + READING *netrw-read* *netrw-nread* {{{2 @@ -241,8 +281,8 @@ DIRECTORY LISTING *netrw-dirlist* {{{2 :e ftp://[user]@hostname/path/ < For remote directories (ie. those using scp or ftp), that trailing - "/" is necessary (it tells netrw that its to treat it as a directory - to browse instead of a file to download). + "/" is necessary (the slash tells netrw to treat the argument as a + directory to browse instead of a file to download). However, the Nread command can also be used to accomplish this: @@ -275,8 +315,17 @@ preferences. One way to look at them is via the command :NetrwSettings (see settings are described below, in |netrw-browser-options|, and in |netrw-externapp|: - *b:netrw_lastfile* last file Network-read/written retained on a per-buffer - basis (supports plain :Nw ) + *b:netrw_lastfile* last file Network-read/written retained on a + per-buffer basis (supports plain :Nw ) + + *g:netrw_chgwin* specifies a window number where file edits will take + place. (also see |netrw-C|) + (default) not defined + + *g:Netrw_funcref* specifies a function to be called when netrw edits + a file. The file is first edited, and then the + function reference (|Funcref|) is called. + (default) not defined *g:netrw_ftp* if it doesn't exist, use default ftp =0 use default ftp (uid password) @@ -285,7 +334,7 @@ settings are described below, in |netrw-browser-options|, and in value of this variable to see if the alternate ftp method works for your setup. - *g:netrw_extracmd* default: doesn't exist + *g:netrw_ftpextracmd* default: doesn't exist If this variable exists, then any string it contains will be placed into the commands set to your ftp client. As an example: @@ -305,8 +354,8 @@ settings are described below, in |netrw-browser-options|, and in *g:netrw_nogx* if this variable exists, then the "gx" map will not be available (see |netrw-gx|) - *g:netrw_uid* (ftp) user-id, retained on a per-session basis - *s:netrw_passwd* (ftp) password, retained on a per-session basis + *g:netrw_uid* (ftp) user-id, retained on a per-vim-session basis + *s:netrw_passwd* (ftp) password, retained on a per-vim-session basis *g:netrw_preview* =0 (default) preview window shown in a horizontally split window @@ -317,6 +366,13 @@ settings are described below, in |netrw-browser-options|, and in *g:netrw_scpport* = "-P" : option to use to set port for scp *g:netrw_sshport* = "-p" : option to use to set port for ssh + *g:netrw_sepchr* =\0xff + =\0x01 for enc == euc-jp (and perhaps it should be for + others, too, please let me + know) + Separates priority codes from filenames internally. + See |netrw-p12|. + *g:netrw_silent* =0 : transfers done normally =1 : transfers done silently @@ -380,6 +436,30 @@ series of commands (typically ftp) which it issues to an external program from/written to a temporary file (under Unix/Linux, /tmp/...) which the <netrw.vim> script will clean up. +Now, a word about Jan Minář's "FTP User Name and Password Disclosure"; first, +ftp is not a secure protocol. User names and passwords are transmitted "in +the clear" over the internet; any snooper tool can pick these up; this is not +a netrw thing, this is a ftp thing. If you're concerned about this, please +try to use scp or sftp instead. + +Netrw re-uses the user id and password during the same vim session and so long +as the remote hostname remains the same. + +Jan seems to be a bit confused about how netrw handles ftp; normally multiple +commands are performed in a "ftp session", and he seems to feel that the +uid/password should only be retained over one ftp session. However, netrw +does every ftp operation in a separate "ftp session"; so remembering the +uid/password for just one "ftp session" would be the same as not remembering +the uid/password at all. IMHO this would rapidly grow tiresome as one +browsed remote directories, for example. + +On the other hand, thanks go to Jan M. for pointing out the many +vulnerabilities that netrw (and vim itself) had had in handling "crafted" +filenames. The |shellescape()| and |fnameescape()| functions were written in +response by Bram Moolenaar to handle these sort of problems, and netrw has +been modified to use them. Still, my advice is, if the "filename" looks like +a vim command that you aren't comfortable with having executed, don't open it. + *netrw-putty* *netrw-pscp* *netrw-psftp* One may modify any protocol's implementing external application by setting a variable (ex. scp uses the variable g:netrw_scp_cmd, which is defaulted to @@ -396,8 +476,8 @@ file). Thus, concerned users may decide to write a NetReadFixup() function that will clean up after reading with their ftp. Some Unix systems (ie., FreeBSD) provide a utility called "fetch" which uses the ftp protocol but is not noisy and more convenient, actually, for <netrw.vim> to use. -Consequently, if "fetch" is executable, it will be used to do reads for -ftp://... (and http://...) . See |netrw-var| for more about this. +Consequently, if "fetch" is available (ie. executable), it may be preferable +to use it for ftp://... based transfers. For rcp, scp, sftp, and http, one may use network-oriented file transfers transparently; ie. @@ -405,7 +485,7 @@ transparently; ie. vim rcp://[user@]machine/path vim scp://[user@]machine/path < -If your ftp supports <.netrc>, then it too can be just as transparently used +If your ftp supports <.netrc>, then it too can be transparently used if the needed triad of machine name, user id, and password are present in that file. Your ftp must be able to use the <.netrc> file on its own, however. > @@ -568,9 +648,8 @@ below, a {netfile} is an url to a remote file. :[range]Nw[rite] {netfile} [{netfile}]... Write the specified lines to the {netfile}. -:Nr[ead] Read the specified lines into the current - buffer from the file specified in - b:netrw_lastfile. +:Nr[ead] Read the lines from the file specified in b:netrw_lastfile + into the current buffer. :Nr[ead] {netfile} {netfile}... Read the {netfile} after the current line. @@ -633,12 +712,9 @@ set in the user's <.vimrc> file: (see also |netrw-settings| |netrw-protocol|) to be ignored. b:netrw_lastfile Holds latest method/machine/path. b:netrw_line Holds current line number (during NetWrite) - g:netrw_passwd Holds current password for ftp. g:netrw_silent =0 transfers done normally =1 transfers done silently g:netrw_uid Holds current user-id for ftp. - =1 use alternate ftp (user uid password) - (see |netrw-options|) g:netrw_use_nt_rcp =0 don't use WinNT/2K/XP's rcp (default) =1 use WinNT/2K/XP's rcp, binary mode g:netrw_win95ftp =0 use unix-style ftp even if win95/98/ME/etc @@ -654,9 +730,10 @@ temporarily. Variable Meaning -------- ------------------------------------ < - g:netrw_method Index indicating rcp/ftp+.netrc/ftp + b:netrw_method Index indicating rcp/ftp+.netrc/ftp + w:netrw_method (same as b:netrw_method) g:netrw_machine Holds machine name parsed from input - g:netrw_fname Holds filename being accessed > + b:netrw_fname Holds filename being accessed > ------------------------------------------------------------ < *netrw-protocol* @@ -678,7 +755,8 @@ variables listed below, and may be modified by the user. read via ftp automatically transformed however they wish by NetReadFixup() - g:netrw_dav_cmd variable ="cadaver" + g:netrw_dav_cmd variable ="cadaver" if cadaver is executable + g:netrw_dav_cmd variable ="curl -o" elseif curl is executable g:netrw_fetch_cmd variable ="fetch -o" if fetch is available g:netrw_ftp_cmd variable ="ftp" g:netrw_http_cmd variable ="fetch -o" if fetch is available @@ -745,7 +823,7 @@ renders the server treatment as "trusted". *netrw-fixup* *netreadfixup* If your ftp for whatever reason generates unwanted lines (such as AUTH -messages) you may write a NetReadFixup(tmpfile) function: +messages) you may write a NetReadFixup() function: > function! NetReadFixup(method,line1,line2) " a:line1: first new line in current file @@ -782,7 +860,7 @@ itself: ============================================================================== 9. Browsing *netrw-browsing* *netrw-browse* *netrw-help* {{{1 - *netrw-browser* *netrw-dir* *netrw-list* + *netrw-browser* *netrw-dir* *netrw-list* INTRODUCTION TO BROWSING *netrw-intro-browse* {{{2 (Quick References: |netrw-quickmaps| |netrw-quickcoms|) @@ -818,7 +896,7 @@ where [protocol] is typically scp or ftp. As an example, try: > vim ftp://ftp.home.vim.org/pub/vim/ < -For local directories, the trailing slash is not required. Again, because its +For local directories, the trailing slash is not required. Again, because it's easy to miss: to browse remote directories, the url must terminate with a slash! @@ -830,6 +908,7 @@ There are several things you can do to affect the browser's display of files: * To change the listing style, press the "i" key (|netrw-i|). Currently there are four styles: thin, long, wide, and tree. + To make that change "permanent", see |g:netrw_liststyle|. * To hide files (don't want to see those xyz~ files anymore?) see |netrw-ctrl-h|. @@ -838,6 +917,18 @@ There are several things you can do to affect the browser's display of files: See |netrw-browse-cmds| for all the things you can do with netrw! + *netrw-getftype* *netrw-filigree* *netrw-ftype* +The |getftype()| function is used to append a bit of filigree to indicate +filetype to locally listed files: + + directory : / + executable : * + fifo : | + links : @ + sockets : = + +The filigree also affects the |g:netrw_sort_sequence|. + QUICK HELP *netrw-quickhelp* {{{2 (Use ctrl-] to select a topic)~ @@ -876,11 +967,11 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS *netrw-browse-maps* {{{2 hiding (suppress display of files matching g:netrw_list_hide) showing (display only files which match g:netrw_list_hide) c Make browsing directory the current directory |netrw-c| + C Setting the editing window |netrw-C| d Make a directory |netrw-d| D Attempt to remove the file(s)/directory(ies) |netrw-D| gb Go to previous bookmarked directory |netrw-gb| gh Quick hide/unhide of dot-files |netrw-gh| - gi Display information on file |netrw-qf| <c-h> Edit file hiding list |netrw-ctrl-h| i Cycle between thin, long, wide, and tree listings |netrw-i| <c-l> Causes Netrw to refresh the directory listing |netrw-ctrl-l| @@ -892,18 +983,19 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS *netrw-browse-maps* {{{2 mh Toggle marked file suffices' presence on hiding list |netrw-mh| mm Move marked files to marked-file target directory |netrw-mm| mp Print marked files |netrw-mp| - mr Mark files satisfying a |regexp| |netrw-mr| + mr Mark files satisfying a shell-style |regexp| |netrw-mr| mt Current browsing directory becomes markfile target |netrw-mt| mT Apply ctags to marked files |netrw-mT| mu Unmark all marked files |netrw-mu| mx Apply arbitrary shell command to marked files |netrw-mx| mz Compress/decompress marked files |netrw-mz| o Enter the file/directory under the cursor in a new |netrw-o| - browser window. A horizontal split is used. + browser window. A horizontal split is used. O Obtain a file specified by cursor |netrw-O| p Preview the file |netrw-p| P Browse in the previously used window |netrw-P| - q List bookmarked directories and history |netrw-qb| + qb List bookmarked directories and history |netrw-qb| + qf Display information on file |netrw-qf| r Reverse sorting order |netrw-r| R Rename the designed file(s)/directory(ies) |netrw-R| s Select sorting style: by name, time, or file size |netrw-s| @@ -912,11 +1004,12 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS *netrw-browse-maps* {{{2 u Change to recently-visited directory |netrw-u| U Change to subsequently-visited directory |netrw-U| v Enter the file/directory under the cursor in a new |netrw-v| - browser window. A vertical split is used. + browser window. A vertical split is used. x View file with an associated program |netrw-x| % Open a new file in netrw's current directory |netrw-%| + *netrw-mouse* *netrw-leftmouse* *netrw-middlemouse* *netrw-rightmouse* <leftmouse> (gvim only) selects word under mouse as if a <cr> had been pressed (ie. edit file, change directory) <middlemouse> (gvim only) same as P selecting word under mouse; @@ -929,7 +1022,7 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS *netrw-browse-maps* {{{2 * the user doesn't already have a <2-leftmouse> mapping defined before netrw is autoloaded, then a double clicked leftmouse button will return - to the netrw browser window. + to the netrw browser window. See |g:netrw_retmap|. <s-leftmouse> (gvim only) like mf, will mark files *netrw-quickcom* *netrw-quickcoms* @@ -946,13 +1039,18 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: COMMANDS *netrw-explore-cmds* *netrw-browse-cmds* {{{2 :Vexplore[!] [dir] Vertical Split & Explore...............|netrw-explore| BOOKMARKING A DIRECTORY *netrw-mb* *netrw-bookmark* *netrw-bookmarks* {{{2 + One may easily "bookmark" a directory by using > - {cnt}mb + mb < -Any count may be used. One may use viminfo's "!" option (|'viminfo'|) to -retain bookmarks between vim sessions. See |netrw-gb| for how to return -to a bookmark and |netrw-qb| for how to list them. +Bookmarks are retained in between sessions in a $HOME/.netrwbook file, and are +kept in sorted order. + +Related Topics: + |netrw-gb| how to return (go) to a bookmark + |netrw-mB| how to delete bookmarks + |netrw-qb| how to list bookmarks BROWSING *netrw-cr* {{{2 @@ -960,7 +1058,7 @@ BROWSING *netrw-cr* {{{2 Browsing is simple: move the cursor onto a file or directory of interest. Hitting the <cr> (the return key) will select the file or directory. Directories will themselves be listed, and files will be opened using the -protocol given in the original read request. +protocol given in the original read request. CAVEAT: There are four forms of listing (see |netrw-i|). Netrw assumes that two or more spaces delimit filenames and directory names for the long and @@ -975,8 +1073,8 @@ horizontally or vertically, respectively. When the option is set to three, a <cr> will cause the file to appear in a new tab. -When using the gui (gvim) one may select a file by pressing the <leftmouse> -button. In addtion, if +When using the gui (gvim), one may select a file by pressing the <leftmouse> +button. In addition, if *|g:netrw_retmap| == 1 AND (its default value is 0) * in a netrw-selected file, AND @@ -1017,19 +1115,19 @@ new window and cursor at the bottom, have let g:netrw_alto = 1 -in your <.vimrc>. (also see |netrw-t| |netrw-v|) - -There is only one tree listing buffer; using "o" on a displayed subdirectory -will split the screen, but the same buffer will be shown twice. +in your <.vimrc>. (also see |netrw-t| |netrw-T| |netrw-v|) Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_alto| |g:netrw_winsize| -BROWSING WITH A NEW TAB *netrw-t* {{{2 +BROWSING WITH A NEW TAB *netrw-t* *netrw-T* {{{2 Normally one enters a file or directory using the <cr>. The "t" map -allows one to open a new window hold the new directory listing or file in a -new tab. (also see: |netrw-o| |netrw-v|) +allows one to open a new window holding the new directory listing or file in +a new tab. The "T" version puts the file or directory into a background tab +(see |gT|) + +Related actions: |netrw-o| |netrw-v| BROWSING WITH A VERTICALLY SPLIT WINDOW *netrw-v* {{{2 @@ -1044,18 +1142,19 @@ window and cursor at the right, have let g:netrw_altv = 1 -in your <.vimrc>. (also see: |netrw-o| |netrw-t|) +in your <.vimrc>. (also see: |netrw-o| |netrw-t| |netrw-T|) -There is only one tree listing buffer; using "v" on a displayed subdirectory +There is only one tree listing buffer; using "v" on a displayed subdirectory will split the screen, but the same buffer will be shown twice. Associated setting variable: |g:netrw_altv| |g:netrw_winsize| -CHANGE LISTING STYLE *netrw-i* {{{2 + +CHANGE LISTING STYLE (THIN LONG WIDE TREE) *netrw-i* {{{2 The "i" map cycles between the thin, long, wide, and tree listing formats. -The short listing format gives just the files' and directories' names. +The thin listing format gives just the files' and directories' names. The long listing is either based on the "ls" command via ssh for remote directories or displays the filename, file size (in bytes), and the time and @@ -1071,13 +1170,23 @@ This listing format is the most compact. The tree listing format has a top directory followed by files and directories preceded by a "|". One may open and close directories by pressing the <cr> -key while atop the directory name. There is only one tree listing buffer; -hence, using "v" or "o" on a subdirectory will only show the same buffer, -twice. +key while atop the directory name. + +One may make a preferred listing style your default; see |g:netrw_liststyle|. +As an example, by putting the following line in your .vimrc, > + let g:netrw_liststyle= 4 +the tree style will become your default listing style. Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_liststyle| |g:netrw_maxfilenamelen| |g:netrw_timefmt| |g:netrw_list_cmd| +CHANGE FILE PERMISSION *netrw-gp* {{{2 + +"gp" will ask you for a new permission for the file named under the cursor. +Currently, this only works for local files. + +Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_chgperm| + CHANGING TO A BOOKMARKED DIRECTORY *netrw-gb* {{{2 @@ -1085,8 +1194,12 @@ To change directory back to a bookmarked directory, use {cnt}gb -Any count may be used to reference any of the bookmarks. See |netrw-mb| on -how to bookmark a directory and |netrw-qb| on how to list bookmarks. +Any count may be used to reference any of the bookmarks. + +Related Topics: + |netrw-mB| how to delete bookmarks + |netrw-mb| how to make a bookmark + |netrw-qb| how to list bookmarks CHANGING TO A PREDECESSOR DIRECTORY *netrw-u* *netrw-updir* {{{2 @@ -1141,7 +1254,7 @@ Netrw determines which special handler by the following method: If g:netrw_browsex_viewer == '-', then netrwFileHandler() will be invoked first (see |netrw_filehandler|). - * for Windows 32 or 64, the url and FileProtocolHandler dlls are used. + * for Windows 32 or 64, the url and FileProtocolHandler dlls are used. * for Gnome (with gnome-open): gnome-open is used. * for KDE (with kfmclient) : kfmclient is used. * for Mac OS X : open is used. @@ -1161,7 +1274,7 @@ the handler function must exist for it to be called! NFH_html("scp://user@host/some/path/mypgm.html") < Users may write their own netrw File Handler functions to support more -suffixes with special handling. See <plugin/netrwFileHandlers.vim> for +suffixes with special handling. See <autoload/netrwFileHandlers.vim> for examples on how to make file handler functions. As an example: > " NFH_suffix(filename) @@ -1175,11 +1288,11 @@ characters (except for the underscore) in them. To support suffices that contain such characters, netrw will first convert the suffix using the following table: > - @ -> AT ! -> EXCLAMATION % -> PERCENT - : -> COLON = -> EQUAL ? -> QUESTION + @ -> AT ! -> EXCLAMATION % -> PERCENT + : -> COLON = -> EQUAL ? -> QUESTION , -> COMMA - -> MINUS ; -> SEMICOLON - $ -> DOLLAR + -> PLUS ~ -> TILDE -< + $ -> DOLLAR + -> PLUS ~ -> TILDE +< So, for example: > file.rcs,v -> NFH_rcsCOMMAv() @@ -1191,6 +1304,18 @@ with a request. Associated setting variable: |g:netrw_browsex_viewer| *netrw-curdir* +DELETING BOOKMARKS *netrw-mB* {{{2 + +To delete a bookmark, use > + + {cnt}mB +< +Related Topics: + |netrw-gb| how to return (go) to a bookmark + |netrw-mb| how to make a bookmark + |netrw-qb| how to list bookmarks + + DELETING FILES OR DIRECTORIES *netrw-delete* *netrw-D* *netrw-del* {{{2 If files have not been marked with |netrw-mf|: (local marked file list) @@ -1232,12 +1357,12 @@ Associated setting variable: |g:netrw_local_rmdir| |g:netrw_rm_cmd| *netrw-rexplore* *netrw-sexplore* *netrw-texplore* *netrw-vexplore* DIRECTORY EXPLORATION COMMANDS {{{2 - :Explore[!] [dir]... Explore directory of current file *:Explore* - :Hexplore[!] [dir]... Horizontal Split & Explore *:Hexplore* - :Rexplore ... Return to Explorer *:Rexplore* - :Sexplore[!] [dir]... Split&Explore directory of current file *:Sexplore* - :Texplore [dir]... Tab & Explore *:Texplore* - :Vexplore[!] [dir]... Vertical Split & Explore *:Vexplore* + :[N]Explore[!] [dir]... Explore directory of current file *:Explore* + :[N]Hexplore[!] [dir]... Horizontal Split & Explore *:Hexplore* + :Rexplore ... Return to Explorer *:Rexplore* + :[N]Sexplore[!] [dir]... Split&Explore current file's directory *:Sexplore* + :Texplore [dir]... Tab & Explore *:Texplore* + :[N]Vexplore[!] [dir]... Vertical Split & Explore *:Vexplore* Used with :Explore **/pattern : (also see |netrw-starstar|) :Nexplore............. go to next matching file *:Nexplore* @@ -1259,17 +1384,21 @@ DIRECTORY EXPLORATION COMMANDS {{{2 :Vexplore! [dir] does an :Explore with |:rightbelow| vertical splitting. :Texplore [dir] does a tabnew before generating the browser window -By default, these commands use the current file's directory. However, one -may explicitly provide a directory (path) to use. +By default, these commands use the current file's directory. However, one may +explicitly provide a directory (path) to use. -The |g:netrw_winsize| variable also is used, if specified by the user, to -size Hexplore and Vexplore windows. +The [N] will override |g:netrw_winsize| to specify the quantity of rows and/or +columns the new explorer window should have. + +Otherwise, the |g:netrw_winsize| variable, if it has been specified by the +user, is used to control the quantity of rows and/or columns new explorer +windows should have. :Rexplore This command is a little different from the others. When one edits a file, for example by pressing <cr> when atop a file in a netrw browser window, :Rexplore will return the display to - that of the last netrw browser window. Its a command version - of <2-leftmouse> (which is only available under gvim and + that of the last netrw browser window. It is a command version + of the <2-leftmouse> map (which is only available under gvim and cooperative terms). @@ -1282,11 +1411,11 @@ the request. > */filepat files in current directory which satisfy filepat **/filepat files in current directory or below which satisfy the - file pattern + file pattern *//pattern files in the current directory which contain the - pattern (vimgrep is used) + pattern (vimgrep is used) **//pattern files in the current directory or below which contain - the pattern (vimgrep is used) + the pattern (vimgrep is used) < The cursor will be placed on the first file in the list. One may then continue to go to subsequent files on that list via |:Nexplore| or to @@ -1339,6 +1468,18 @@ be the only ones displayed (see |netrw-a|). The "gh" mapping (see |netrw-gh|) quickly alternates between the usual hiding list and the hiding of files or directories that begin with ".". +As an example, > + let g:netrw_list_hide= '\(^\|\s\s\)\zs\.\S\+' +Effectively, this makes the effect of a |netrw-gh| command the initial setting. +What it means: + + \(^\|\s\s\) : if the line begins with the following, -or- + two consecutive spaces are encountered + \zs : start the hiding match now + \. : if it now begins with a dot + \S\+ : and is followed by one or more non-whitespace + characters + Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_hide| |g:netrw_list_hide| Associated topics: |netrw-a| |netrw-gh| |netrw-mh| @@ -1349,7 +1490,12 @@ When "Sorted by" is name, one may specify priority via the sorting sequence (g:netrw_sort_sequence). The sorting sequence typically prioritizes the name-listing by suffix, although any pattern will do. Patterns are delimited by commas. The default sorting sequence is (all one line): -> + +For Unix: > + '[\/]$,\<core\%(\.\d\+\)\=,\.[a-np-z]$,\.h$,\.c$,\.cpp$,*,\.o$,\.obj$, + \.info$,\.swp$,\.bak$,\~$' +< +Otherwise: > '[\/]$,\.[a-np-z]$,\.h$,\.c$,\.cpp$,*,\.o$,\.obj$,\.info$, \.swp$,\.bak$,\~$' < @@ -1508,11 +1654,15 @@ passwords: LISTING BOOKMARKS AND HISTORY *netrw-qb* *netrw-listbookmark* {{{2 -Pressing "qb" (query bookmarks) will list the bookmarked directories and -directory traversal history (query). - -(see |netrw-mb|, |netrw-gb|, |netrw-u|, and |netrw-U|) +Pressing "qb" (query bookmarks) will list both the bookmarked directories and +directory traversal history. +Related Topics: + |netrw-gb| how to return (go) to a bookmark + |netrw-mb| how to make a bookmark + |netrw-mB| how to delete bookmarks + |netrw-u| change to a predecessor directory via the history stack + |netrw-U| change to a successor directory via the history stack MAKING A NEW DIRECTORY *netrw-d* {{{2 @@ -1584,10 +1734,11 @@ MARKING FILES BY REGULAR EXPRESSION *netrw-mr* {{{2 (also see |netrw-mf|) One may also mark files by pressing "mr"; netrw will then issue a prompt, -"Enter regexp: ". You may then enter a regular expression such as \.c$ . -All files in the current directory will then be marked. Note that the -regular expressions are vim-style |regexp| ones, not shell ones. So -entering *.c probably isn't what you want! +"Enter regexp: ". You may then enter a shell-style regular expression such +as *.c$ (see |glob()|). For remote systems, glob() doesn't work -- so netrw +converts "*" into ".*" (see |regexp|) and marks files based on that. In the +future I may make it possible to use |regexp|s instead of glob()-style +expressions (yet-another-option). MARKED FILES: ARBITRARY COMMAND *netrw-mx* {{{2 @@ -1670,7 +1821,7 @@ MARKED FILES: MOVING *netrw-mm* {{{2 first or do the copy and then delete yourself using mc and D. Use at your own risk! -Select a target directory with mT (|netrw-mt|). Then change directory, +Select a target directory with mt (|netrw-mt|). Then change directory, select file(s) (see |netrw-mf|), and press "mm". Associated setting variable: |g:netrw_localmovecmd| |g:netrw_ssh_cmd| @@ -1695,7 +1846,7 @@ MARKED FILES: TAGGING *netrw-mT* {{{2 (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files) (uses the global marked file list) -The "mt" mapping will apply the command in |g:netrw_ctags| (by default, its +The "mT" mapping will apply the command in |g:netrw_ctags| (by default, it is "ctags") to marked files. For remote browsing, in order to create a tags file netrw will use ssh (see |g:netrw_ssh_cmd|), and so ssh must be available for this to work on remote systems. For your local system, see |ctags| on how to @@ -1743,7 +1894,7 @@ The "mu" mapping will unmark all currently marked files. NETRW BROWSER VARIABLES *netrw-browser-options* *netrw-browser-var* {{{2 -(if you're interestd in the netrw file transfer settings, see |netrw-options|) +(if you're interested in the netrw file transfer settings, see |netrw-options|) The <netrw.vim> browser provides settings in the form of variables which you may modify; by placing these settings in your <.vimrc>, you may customize @@ -1760,12 +1911,21 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) by setting this variable (see |netrw-v|) default: =&spr (see |'spr'|) + *g:netrw_banner* enable/suppress the banner + =0: suppress the banner + =1: banner is enabled (default) + NOTE: suppressing the banner is a new feature + which may cause problems. + *g:netrw_browse_split* when browsing, <cr> will open the file by: =0: re-using the same window - =1: horizontally splitting the window first - =2: vertically splitting the window first + =1: horizontally splitting the window first + =2: vertically splitting the window first =3: open file in new tab =4: act like "P" (ie. open previous window) + Note that |g:netrw_preview| may be used + to get vertical splitting instead of + horizontal splitting. *g:netrw_browsex_viewer* specify user's preference for a viewer: > "kfmclient exec" @@ -1776,6 +1936,10 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) a script/function to handle the given extension. (see |netrw_filehandler|). + *g:netrw_chgperm* Unix/Linux: "chmod PERM FILENAME" + Windows: "cacls FILENAME /e /p PERM" + Used to change access permission for a file. + *g:netrw_compress* ="gzip" Will compress marked files with this command @@ -1783,6 +1947,16 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) *g:netrw_ctags* ="ctags" The default external program used to create tags + *g:netrw_cursorline* = 1 (default) + will use the |'cursorline'| local setting when + |g:netrw_liststyle| ==0 (thin listing) or + |g:netrw_liststyle| ==1 (long listing) or + |g:netrw_liststyle| ==3 (tree listing) + (ie. doesn't affect the wide listing) + =0: off + =2: like ==1, but the wide listing gets both + cursorline and |'cursorcolumn'|locally set + *g:netrw_decompress* = { ".gz" : "gunzip" , ".bz2" : "bunzip2" , ".zip" : "unzip" , @@ -1815,7 +1989,7 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) versus speed. *g:netrw_fname_escape* =' ?&;%' - Used on filenames before remote reading/writing + Used on filenames before remote reading/writing *g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject* ftp can produce a number of errors and warnings that can show up as "directories" and "files" @@ -1849,12 +2023,18 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) otherwise "dir" *g:netrw_glob_escape* ='[]*?`{~$' - These characters in directory names are + These characters in directory names are escaped before applying glob() *g:netrw_hide* if true, the hiding list is used default: =0 + *g:netrw_home* The home directory for where bookmarks and + history are saved (as .netrwbook and + .netrwhist). + default: the first directory on the + |'runtimepath'| + *g:netrw_keepdir* =1 (default) keep current directory immune from the browsing directory. =0 keep the current directory the same as the @@ -1878,12 +2058,12 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) default: "" *g:netrw_localcopycmd* ="cp" Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin - ="copy" Windows + ="copy" Windows Copies marked files (|netrw-mf|) to target directory (|netrw-mt|, |netrw-mc|) *g:netrw_localmovecmd* ="mv" Linux/Unix/MacOS/Cygwin - ="move" Windows + ="move" Windows Moves marked files (|netrw-mf|) to target directory (|netrw-mt|, |netrw-mm|) @@ -1903,11 +2083,31 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) *g:netrw_mkdir_cmd* command for making a remote directory default: "ssh USEPORT HOSTNAME mkdir" - *g:netrw_retmap* if it exists and is set to one, then - <2-leftmouse> will be mapped for easy + *g:netrw_mousemaps* =1 (default) enables the mouse buttons + while browsing: + leftmouse : open file/directory + shift-leftmouse : mark file + middlemouse : same as P + rightmouse : remove file/directory + =0: disables mouse maps + + *g:netrw_retmap* if it exists and is set to one, then: + * if in a netrw-selected file, AND + * no normal-mode <2-leftmouse> mapping exists, + then the <2-leftmouse> will be mapped for easy return to the netrw browser window. - (example: click once to select and open - a file, double-click to return) + example: click once to select and open a file, + double-click to return. + + Note that one may instead choose to: + * let g:netrw_retmap= 1, AND + * nmap <silent> YourChoice <Plug>NetrwReturn + and have another mapping instead of + <2-leftmouse> to invoke the return. + + You may also use the |:Rexplore| command to do + the same thing. + default: =0 *g:netrw_rm_cmd* command for removing files @@ -1934,12 +2134,14 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) < default: "" *g:netrw_sort_sequence* when sorting by name, first sort by the - comma-separated pattern sequence + comma-separated pattern sequence. Note that + the filigree added to indicate filetypes + should be accounted for in your pattern. default: '[\/]$,*,\.bak$,\.o$,\.h$, \.info$,\.swp$,\.obj$' *g:netrw_special_syntax* If true, then certain files will be shown - in special syntax in the browser: + in special syntax in the browser: netrwBak : *.bak netrwCompress: *.gz *.bz2 *.Z *.zip @@ -1974,7 +2176,7 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) *g:netrw_tmpfile_escape* =' &;' - escape() is applied to all temporary files + escape() is applied to all temporary files to escape these characters. *g:netrw_timefmt* specify format string to vim's strftime(). @@ -1988,7 +2190,7 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) default: "%c" *g:netrw_use_noswf* netrw normally avoids writing swapfiles - for browser buffers. However, under some + for browser buffers. However, under some systems this apparently is causing nasty ml_get errors to appear; if you're getting ml_get errors, try putting @@ -2000,18 +2202,18 @@ your browsing preferences. (see also: |netrw-settings|) |:Hexplore| or |:Vexplore|. default: "" - *g:netrw_xstrlen* Controls how netrw computes a string - including multi-byte characters' string + *g:netrw_xstrlen* Controls how netrw computes string lengths, + including multi-byte characters' string length. (thanks to N Weibull, T Mechelynck) =0: uses Vim's built-in strlen() - =1: number of codepoints (Latin + a combining + =1: number of codepoints (Latin a + combining circumflex is two codepoints) (DEFAULT) =2: number of spacing codepoints (Latin a + - combining circumflex is one spacing + combining circumflex is one spacing codepoint; a hard tab is one; wide and narrow CJK are one each; etc.) =3: virtual length (counting tabs as anything - between 1 and |'tabstop'|, wide CJJK as 2 + between 1 and |'tabstop'|, wide CJK as 2 rather than 1, Arabic alif as zero when immediately preceded by lam, one otherwise, etc) @@ -2162,6 +2364,16 @@ Related topics: |netrw-r| |netrw-S| Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence| +SETTING EDITING WINDOW *netrw-C* {{{2 + +One may select a netrw window for editing with the "C" mapping, or by setting +g:netrw_chgwin to the selected window number. Subsequent selection of a file +to edit (|netrw-cr|) will use that window. + +Related topics: |netrw-cr| +Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_chgwin| + + 10. Problems and Fixes *netrw-problems* {{{1 (This section is likely to grow as I get feedback) @@ -2183,7 +2395,7 @@ Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence| Windows' ftp has a minimal support for ls (ie. it doesn't accept sorting options). It doesn't support the -F which gives an explanatory character (ABC/ for "ABC is a directory"). - Netrw then uses "dir" to get both its short and long listings. + Netrw then uses "dir" to get both its thin and long listings. If you think your ftp does support a full-up ls, put the following into your <.vimrc>: > @@ -2238,7 +2450,7 @@ Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence| Put the following line in your |.vimrc|: > let g:netrw_keepdir= 0 -< +< *netrw-p7* P7. I use Chinese (or other non-ascii) characters in my filenames, and netrw (Explore, Sexplore, Hexplore, etc) doesn't display them! @@ -2266,7 +2478,7 @@ Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence| (Marlin Unruh) This program also works for me. It's a single executable, so he/she can copy it into the Windows\System32 - folder and create a shortcut to it. + folder and create a shortcut to it. (Dudley Fox) You might also wish to consider plink, as it sounds most similar to what you are looking for. plink is an @@ -2274,12 +2486,12 @@ Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence| http://the.earth.li/~sgtatham/putty/0.58/htmldoc/Chapter7.html#plink - (Vissale Neang) Maybe you can try OpenSSH for windows, which + (Vissale Neang) Maybe you can try OpenSSH for windows, which can be obtained from: http://sshwindows.sourceforge.net/ - It doesn't need the full Cygwin package. + It doesn't need the full Cygwin package. (Antoine Mechelynck) For individual Unix-like programs needed for work in a native-Windows environment, I recommend getting @@ -2290,7 +2502,7 @@ Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence| Unlike Cygwin, which sets up a Unix-like virtual machine on top of Windows, GnuWin32 is a rewrite of Unix utilities with Windows system calls, and its programs works quite well in the - cmd.exe "Dos box". + cmd.exe "Dos box". (dave) Download WinSCP and use that to connect to the server. In Preferences > Editors, set gvim as your editor: @@ -2317,7 +2529,7 @@ Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence| How to use a private key with 'pscp': > http://www.tartarus.org/~simon/puttydoc/Chapter5.html - 5.2.4 Using public key authentication with PSCP + 5.2.4 Using public key authentication with PSCP < (Ben Schmidt) I find the ssh included with cwRsync is brilliant, and install cwRsync or cwRsyncServer on most @@ -2375,6 +2587,16 @@ Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence| <leftmouse> in the browser window and then press the <middlemouse> to select the file. + *netrw-p12* + P12. My directory isn't sorting correctly, or unwanted letters are + appearing in the listed filenames, or things aren't lining + up properly in the wide listing, ... + + This may be due to an encoding problem. I myself usually use + utf-8, but really only use ascii (ie. bytes from 32-126). + Multibyte encodings use two (or more) bytes per character. + You may need to change |g:netrw_sepchr| and/or |g:netrw_xstrlen|. + ============================================================================== 11. Debugging Netrw Itself *netrw-debug* {{{1 @@ -2420,7 +2642,7 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp). read/write your file over the network in a separate tab. To save the file, use > - :wincmd j + :tabnext :set bt= :w! DBG < Please send that information to <netrw.vim>'s maintainer, > @@ -2429,6 +2651,94 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp). ============================================================================== 12. History *netrw-history* {{{1 + v136: Jan 14, 2009 * extended |g:Netrw_funcref| to also handle lists + of function references + Jan 14, 2009 * (reported by Marvin Renich) with spell check + enabled, some filenamess will still being + displayed as spelling errors. + Apr 13, 2009 * (Björn Winckler) writing a file using + remote scp caused syntax highlighting problem. + Solution: avoid syntax/syntax.vim's + au Filetype * syntax setting autocommand by + checking that the current buffer has the + netrw filetype before attempting a doau + in s:NetrwSafeOptions(). + Apr 14, 2009 * (asgeo1) suggested the "T" map (|netrw-T|) + Apr 14, 2009 * marking wasn't working on executable and + other special filenames + Apr 20, 2009 * (Dennis Benzinger) files opened via http have + their syntax filetype auto-detected + Jun 19, 2009 * (Yukihiro Nakadaira) help document improvements + Jul 22, 2009 * g:netrw_browse_split will honor the + |'equalalways'| setting. + Jul 29, 2009 * implemented "I" mapping to toggle banner + (this is experimental and still being debugged) + Sep 19, 2009 * (Mike McEwan) writes via ftp now send both + g:netrw_ftpmode and g:netrw_ftpextracmd (if the + latter exists) + Dec 02, 2009 * netrw uses vimgrep several places; it now uses + "noautocmd vimgrep" (should be speedier). + Dec 03, 2009 * changed back to using -source instead of -dump + for elinks-using commands. (requested by James + Vega and Karsten Hopp) + v135: Oct 29, 2008 * using |simplify()| on directory names + (supporting handling ".."s in directory names) + Oct 31, 2008 * added special file highlighting for core dumps + under Unix/Linux. The default sorting sequence + now also gives core dumps priority. + Nov 10, 2008 * uses a call to netrw#Nread() instead of Nread + to avoid having to use fnameescape() + * fixed a tree redrawing problem (open directory, + open subdir, close subdir, close dir) + Nov 19, 2008 * sprinkled some histdel("/",-1)s through the code + in an attempt to prevent netrw from changing + the search history. + Jan 02, 2009 * |g:Netrw_funcref| included + Jan 05, 2009 * Explore */ **/ *// **// all clear explorer + variables + Jan 05, 2009 * (Panagiotis Louridas) extended s:WinPath() + to remove cygdrive from non-cygwin Windows + paths. Improved the determination as to + whether or not to do so. + Jan 13, 2009 * included contains=@NoSpell in every syntax + group for syntax/netrw.vim . + v134: Sep 30, 2008 * (Sander Marechal) provided a bugfix involving + the use of the |netrw-t| command with a remote + directory. + Sep 30, 2008 * using "x" on a remote jpg was failing; fixed. + Oct 03, 2008 * bookmarks now go on a list and are stored to + the first directory on the |'runtimepath'| in + the hopes of making their retention reliable. + History now also goes to that directory. + Oct 07, 2008 * Included check that vim 7.0 or later is in use. + Oct 07, 2008 * Improved |g:netrw_retmap| handling. + Oct 12, 2008 * Based upon Sébastien Migniot's suggestion, if + cadaver isn't available then netrw will try to + use curl for the dav://... protocol. + Oct 13, 2008 * added @*/ to netrw buffers' |'iskeyword'|setting + This lets mf (|netrw-mf|) mark directories, links + and executables. + Oct 13, 2008 * avoids a second NetrwBrowse() refresh when + g:netrw_fastbrowse is <= 1 (slow, medium speed) + Oct 22, 2008 * |g:netrw_http_xcmd| may now be overridden + independently of |g:netrw_http_cmd|. + Oct 23, 2008 * [N] added to the various Explore commands to + let users specify the width/height of new + explorer windows, overriding |g:netrw_winsize|. + v133: Aug 10, 2008 * NetReadFixup() for win95 was missing some "a:"s + Aug 12, 2008 * (Jan Minář) an error condition in NetrwMethod() + wasn't being used, resulting in "b:netrw_fname + undefined" errors + Aug 12, 2008 * (François Ingeirest) asked that "hi link" be + changed to hi default link in the netrw syntax + files. + Aug 12, 2008 * using s:NetrwUnmarkList() more often. Filenames + were being left on the global list when removed + from the buffer-local lists. + Aug 14, 2008 * (Joshua Clayton) an errant extra ")" was left in + the rcp-handling portion of NetRead(). + Sep 03, 2008 * added |'cursorline'| highlighting to thin, long, + and tree displays. v132: Aug 06, 2008 * Fixed marked file-based obtain Aug 08, 2008 * sourcing a file via ftp from a netrw-generated buffer (or any buffer with |'nobl'|) left an @@ -2543,8 +2853,8 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp). * executable files now displayed with trailing (*) * symbolically linked files now displayed with trailing (@) - * Somewhen, s:NetrwMarkFileMove() got damaged. Its - now restored (missing an endif, for example). + * Somewhen, s:NetrwMarkFileMove() got damaged. It + * is now restored (missing an endif, for example). * |netrw-mu| implemented (unmarking marked files) * many bugs have been removed from the marked file system (tnx to Mark S. for feedback) @@ -2615,7 +2925,7 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp). the end of the s:NetrwBrowseChgDir() function; they're now at the end of every if..elseif..else block. The edit-a-file one is not quite at the end - of its block; instead, its just before the edit. + of its block; instead, it's just before the edit. Restores user options, then this new placement allows ftplugins, autocmds, etc to change settings (ex. ftplugin/cpp.vim sets cindent). @@ -2652,7 +2962,7 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp). marked files. v110: May 10, 2007 * added [ and ] maps to NetrwTreeListing May 25, 2007 * |g:netrw_preview| included - May 29, 2007 * modifed netrw#NetBrowseX to consistently use + May 29, 2007 * modified netrw#NetBrowseX to consistently use g:netrw_shq instead of hardcoded quotes, and modified the snippet that sets up redir so Windows machines use "nul" instead of @@ -2668,7 +2978,7 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp). decipher the name. May 07, 2007 * g:netrw_use_errorwindow now allows one to have error messages go to a reliable window - or to use a less reliable but recallable + or to use a less reliable but recallable echoerr method May 07, 2007 * g:netrw_scpport and g:netrw_sshport support use of -P and -p, respectively, to set port @@ -3113,7 +3423,16 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp). ============================================================================== -12. Credits *netrw-credits* {{{1 +13. Todo *netrw-todo* {{{1 + +07/29/09 : banner :|g:netrw_banner| can be used to suppress the + suppression banner. This feature is new and experimental, + so its in the process of being debugged. +09/04/09 : "gp" : See if it can be made to work for remote systems. + : See if it can be made to work with marked files. + +============================================================================== +14. Credits *netrw-credits* {{{1 Vim editor by Bram Moolenaar (Thanks, Bram!) dav support by C Campbell diff --git a/runtime/doc/pi_tar.txt b/runtime/doc/pi_tar.txt index 582a25d62..30cc5dde9 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/pi_tar.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/pi_tar.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*pi_tar.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 09 +*pi_tar.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Dec 28 +====================+ | Tar File Interface | @@ -26,6 +26,33 @@ Copyright 2005-2008: The GPL (gnu public license) applies to *tar-copyright* also write to the file. Currently, one may not make a new file in tar archives via the plugin. + *:Untarvim* + UNTARVIM~ + + :Untarvim [vimhome] + + This command copies, if necessary, the tarball to the .vim or vimfiles + directory using the first writable directory in the |'runtimepath'| + when no [vimhome] is specified. Otherwise, the [vimhome] argument + allows the user to specify that directory, instead. + + The copy is done using the command in *g:tar_copycmd* , which is > + cp for cygwin, unix, macunix + copy for windows (32, 95, 64, 16) +< The extraction is done with the command specified with + *g:tar_extractcmd* , which by default is > + "tar -xf" +< + PREVENTING LOADING~ + + If for some reason you do not wish to use vim to examine tar'd files, + you may put the following two variables into your <.vimrc> to prevent + the tar plugin from loading: > + + let g:loaded_tarPlugin= 1 + let g:loaded_tar = 1 +< + ============================================================================== 3. Options *tar-options* @@ -38,14 +65,15 @@ Copyright 2005-2008: The GPL (gnu public license) applies to *tar-copyright* *g:tar_cmd* "tar" the name of the tar program *g:tar_nomax* 0 if true, file window will not be maximized *g:tar_secure* undef if exists: - "--" will be used to prevent unwanted + "--"s will be used to prevent unwanted option expansion in tar commands. Please be sure that your tar command accepts "--"; Posix compliant tar - utilities do accept it. + utilities do accept them. if not exists: - The tar plugin will reject any member - files that begin with "-" + The tar plugin will reject any tar + files or member files that begin with + "-" Not all tar's support the "--" which is why it isn't default. *g:tar_writeoptions* "uf" used to update/replace a file @@ -54,6 +82,9 @@ Copyright 2005-2008: The GPL (gnu public license) applies to *tar-copyright* ============================================================================== 4. History *tar-history* + + v24 Apr 07, 2009 * :Untarvim command implemented + Sep 28, 2009 * Added lzma support v22 Aug 08, 2008 * security fixes v16 Jun 06, 2008 * tarfile:: used instead of tarfile: when editing files inside tarballs. Fixes a problem with tarballs called diff --git a/runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt b/runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt index 143396e01..885131e29 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*pi_vimball.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jul 30 +*pi_vimball.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Dec 28 ---------------- Vimball Archiver @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Author: Charles E. Campbell, Jr. <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM> (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first) -Copyright: (c) 2004-2008 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *Vimball-copyright* +Copyright: (c) 2004-2009 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *Vimball-copyright* The VIM LICENSE applies to Vimball.vim, and Vimball.txt (see |copyright|) except use "Vimball" instead of "Vim". No warranty, express or implied. @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Copyright: (c) 2004-2008 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *Vimball-copyright* ============================================================================== 3. Vimball Manual *vimball-manual* - *:MkVimball* +MAKING A VIMBALL *:MkVimball* :[range]MkVimball[!] filename [path] The range is composed of lines holding paths to files to be included @@ -79,28 +79,33 @@ Copyright: (c) 2004-2008 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *Vimball-copyright* "filename.vba" file, overwriting it if it already exists. This behavior resembles that for |:w|. - *g:vimball_mkdir* + If you wish to force slashes into the filename, that can also be done + by using the exclamation mark (ie. :MkVimball! path/filename). + + The tip at http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/Using_VimBall_with_%27Make%27 + has a good idea on how to automate the production of vimballs using + make. + + +MAKING DIRECTORIES VIA VIMBALLS *g:vimball_mkdir* + First, the |mkdir()| command is tried (not all systems support it). - If it doesn't exist, then g:vimball_mkdir doesn't exist, it is set to: + If it doesn't exist, then if g:vimball_mkdir doesn't exist, it is set + as follows: > |g:netrw_local_mkdir|, if it exists - "mkdir", if it is executable - "makedir", if it is executable - Otherwise, it is undefined. - One may explicitly specify the directory making command using + "mkdir" , if it is executable + "makedir" , if it is executable + Otherwise , it is undefined. +< One may explicitly specify the directory making command using g:vimball_mkdir. This command is used to make directories that are needed as indicated by the vimball. - *g:vimball_home* - You may override the use of the |'runtimepath'| by specifying a - variable, g:vimball_home. - Path Preprocessing *g:vimball_path_escape* +CONTROLLING THE VIMBALL EXTRACTION DIRECTORY *g:vimball_home* - Paths used in vimball are preprocessed by s:Path(); in addition, - certain characters are escaped (by prepending a backslash). The - characters are in g:vimball_path_escape, and may be overridden by - the user in his/her .vimrc initialization script. + You may override the use of the |'runtimepath'| by specifying a + variable, g:vimball_home. *vimball-extract* vim filename.vba @@ -112,12 +117,16 @@ Copyright: (c) 2004-2008 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *Vimball-copyright* file holds the "Vimball Archiver by Charles E. Campbell, Jr., Ph.D." line. - :VimballList *:VimballList* +LISTING FILES IN A VIMBALL *:VimballList* + + :VimballList This command will tell Vimball to list the files in the archive, along with their lengths in lines. - :UseVimball [path] *:UseVimball* +MANUALLY INVOKING VIMBALL EXTRACTION *:UseVimball* + + :UseVimball [path] This command is contained within the vimball itself; it invokes the vimball#Vimball() routine which is responsible for unpacking the @@ -126,7 +135,9 @@ Copyright: (c) 2004-2008 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *Vimball-copyright* installation, thereby overriding the automatic choice of the first existing directory on the |'runtimepath'|. - :RmVimball vimballfile [path] *:RmVimball* +REMOVING A VIMBALL *:RmVimball* + + :RmVimball vimballfile [path] This command removes all files generated by the specified vimball (but not any directories it may have made). One may choose a path @@ -136,10 +147,29 @@ Copyright: (c) 2004-2008 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr. *Vimball-copyright* containing a record of what files need to be removed for all vimballs used thus far. +PREVENTING LOADING + + If for some reason you don't want to be able to extract plugins + using vimballs: you may prevent the loading of vimball.vim by + putting the following two variables in your <.vimrc>: > + + let g:loaded_vimballPlugin= 1 + let g:loaded_vimball = 1 +< ============================================================================== 4. Vimball History *vimball-history* {{{1 + 30 : Dec 08, 2008 * fnameescape() inserted to protect error + messaging using corrupted filenames from + causing problems + * RmVimball supports filenames that would + otherwise be considered to have "magic" + characters (ie. Abc[1].vba) + Feb 18, 2009 * s:Escape(), g:vimball_shq, and g:netrw_shq + removed (shellescape() used directly) + Oct 05, 2009 * (Nikolai Weibull) suggested that MkVimball + be allowed to use slashes in the filename. 26 : May 27, 2008 * g:vimball_mkdir usage installed. Makes the $HOME/.vim (or $HOME\vimfiles) directory if necessary. diff --git a/runtime/doc/print.txt b/runtime/doc/print.txt index 440152dec..a4a2ffef8 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/print.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/print.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*print.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Apr 30 +*print.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Dec 17 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ print output, turn it over and place it back in the paper feeder. Now print even.ps with your platform's print command. All the even pages should now appear on the back of the odd pages. -There a couple of points to bear in mind: +There are a couple of points to bear in mind: 1. Position of the first page. If the first page is on top of the printout when printing the odd pages then you need to reverse the order that the odd diff --git a/runtime/doc/quickfix.txt b/runtime/doc/quickfix.txt index 6734170e5..b73431511 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/quickfix.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/quickfix.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*quickfix.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Mar 14 +*quickfix.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 May 24 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -630,14 +630,20 @@ id-utils) in a similar way to its compiler integration (see |:make| above). Just like ":grep", but instead of making a new list of errors the matches are appended to the current list. Example: > - :grep nothing % + :call setqflist([]) :bufdo grepadd! something % < The first command makes a new error list which is empty. The second command executes "grepadd" for each listed buffer. Note the use of ! to avoid that ":grepadd" jumps to the first error, which is not allowed with |:bufdo|. - + An example that uses the argument list and avoids + errors for files without matches: > + :silent argdo try + \ | grepadd! something % + \ | catch /E480:/ + \ | endtry" +< *:lgrepa* *:lgrepadd* :lgrepa[dd][!] [arguments] Same as ":grepadd", except the location list for the diff --git a/runtime/doc/quickref.txt b/runtime/doc/quickref.txt index 9589e8687..78599cfe4 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/quickref.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/quickref.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*quickref.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jan 22 +*quickref.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Jan 22 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -40,13 +40,13 @@ N is used to indicate an optional count that can be given before the command. |^| ^ to first non-blank character in the line |$| N $ to the last character in the line (N-1 lines lower) (also: <End> key) -|g0| N g0 to first character in screen line (differs from "0" +|g0| g0 to first character in screen line (differs from "0" when lines wrap) -|g^| N g^ to first non-blank character in screen line (differs +|g^| g^ to first non-blank character in screen line (differs from "^" when lines wrap) |g$| N g$ to last character in screen line (differs from "$" when lines wrap) -|gm| N gm to middle of the screen line +|gm| gm to middle of the screen line |bar| N | to column N (default: 1) |f| N f{char} to the Nth occurrence of {char} to the right |F| N F{char} to the Nth occurrence of {char} to the left diff --git a/runtime/doc/quotes.txt b/runtime/doc/quotes.txt index 98d435742..e6f211203 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/quotes.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/quotes.txt @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ transition - as an Editor it is so much better in many ways: keyboard layout, memory usage, text alteration to name 3. (Mark Adam) In fact, now if I want to know what a particular setting does in vi, I fire up -VIM and check out it's help! (Nikhil Patel, USA) +VIM and check out its help! (Nikhil Patel, USA) As a vi user, VIM has made working with text a far more pleasant task than before I encountered this program. (Steinar Knutsen, Norway) diff --git a/runtime/doc/recover.txt b/runtime/doc/recover.txt index b82ea670a..f97acd0ac 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/recover.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/recover.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*recover.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 24 +*recover.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Apr 18 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ parts of the original file were not written to disk. Be sure that the recovery was successful before overwriting the original file or deleting the swap file. It is good practice to write the recovered file elsewhere and run 'diff' to find out if the changes you want are in the -recovered file. +recovered file. Or use |:DiffOrig|. Once you are sure the recovery is ok delete the swap file. Otherwise, you will continue to get warning messages that the ".swp" file already exists. diff --git a/runtime/doc/repeat.txt b/runtime/doc/repeat.txt index 7dbd49455..16a1b2cf0 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/repeat.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/repeat.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*repeat.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2007 Aug 12 +*repeat.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 04 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -332,6 +332,12 @@ Note however that trailing whitespace in the line before it cannot be inserted freely; it depends on the position where a command is split up whether additional whitespace is allowed or not. +When a space is required it's best to put it right after the backslash. A +space at the end of a line is hard to see and may be accidentally deleted. > + :syn match Comment + \ "very long regexp" + \ keepend + There is a problem with the ":append" and ":insert" commands: > :1append \asdf diff --git a/runtime/doc/spell.txt b/runtime/doc/spell.txt index 93b3ad875..8a559dde8 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/spell.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/spell.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*spell.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Nov 30 +*spell.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Oct 28 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -1279,7 +1279,7 @@ compound word. The word itself is not a good word. Example: *spell-ONLYINCOMPOUND* The ONLYINCOMPOUND does exactly the same as NEEDCOMPOUND. Supported for -compatiblity with Hunspell. +compatibility with Hunspell. *spell-COMPOUNDMIN* The minimal character length of a word used for compounding is specified with diff --git a/runtime/doc/starting.txt b/runtime/doc/starting.txt index 4c126516c..868ac0a32 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/starting.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/starting.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*starting.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Nov 09 +*starting.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Dec 31 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -338,12 +338,19 @@ a slash. Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly. *-C* -C Compatible mode. Sets the 'compatible' option. You can use this to get 'compatible', even though a .vimrc file exists. - But the command ":set nocompatible" overrules it anyway. - Also see |compatible-default|. {not in Vi} + Keep in mind that the command ":set nocompatible" in some + plugin or startup script overrules this, so you may end up + with 'nocmpatible' anyway. To find out, use: > + :verbose set compatible? +< Several plugins won't work with 'compatible' set. You may + want to set it after startup this way: > + vim "+set cp" filename +< Also see |compatible-default|. {not in Vi} *-N* -N Not compatible mode. Resets the 'compatible' option. You can - use this to get 'nocompatible', when there is no .vimrc file. + use this to get 'nocompatible', when there is no .vimrc file + or when using "-u NONE". Also see |compatible-default|. {not in Vi} *-y* *easy* @@ -361,6 +368,8 @@ a slash. Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly. Can also be done with ":set updatecount=0". You can switch it on again by setting the 'updatecount' option to some value, e.g., ":set uc=100". + NOTE: Don't combine -n with -b, making -nb, because that has a + different meaning: |-nb|. 'updatecount' is set to 0 AFTER executing commands from a vimrc file, but before the GUI initializations. Thus it overrides a setting for 'updatecount' in a vimrc file, but not @@ -593,17 +602,8 @@ a slash. Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly. it. The second form specifies a file to read connection info from. The third form specifies the hostname, address and password for connecting to Netbeans. |netbeans-run| - -Example for using a script file to change a name in several files: - Create a file "subs.vi" containing substitute commands and a :wq - command: > - :%s/Jones/Smith/g - :%s/Allen/Peter/g - :wq -< - Execute Vim on all files you want to change: > - - foreach i ( *.let ) vim -s subs.vi $i + {only available when compiled with the |+netbeans_intg| + feature; if not then -nb will make Vim exit} If the executable is called "view", Vim will start in Readonly mode. This is useful if you can make a hard or symbolic link from "view" to "vim". @@ -777,10 +777,11 @@ accordingly. Vim proceeds in this order: nocp" command if you like. For the Macintosh the $VIMRUNTIME/macmap.vim is read. - *VIMINIT* *.vimrc* *_vimrc* *EXINIT* *.exrc* *_exrc* + *VIMINIT* *.vimrc* *_vimrc* *EXINIT* *.exrc* *_exrc* *$MYVIMRC* c. Four places are searched for initializations. The first that exists is used, the others are ignored. The $MYVIMRC environment variable is - set to the file that was first found, unless $MYVIMRC was already set. + set to the file that was first found, unless $MYVIMRC was already set + and when using VIMINIT. - The environment variable VIMINIT (see also |compatible-default|) (*) The value of $VIMINIT is used as an Ex command line. - The user vimrc file(s): @@ -969,7 +970,8 @@ part of the line in the tags file) is always done in secure mode. This works just like executing a command from a vimrc/exrc in the current directory. *slow-start* -If Vim takes a long time to start up, there may be a few causes: +If Vim takes a long time to start up, use the |--startuptime| argument to find +out what happens. There are a few common causes: - If the Unix version was compiled with the GUI and/or X11 (check the output of ":version" for "+GUI" and "+X11"), it may need to load shared libraries and connect to the X11 server. Try compiling a version with GUI and X11 @@ -990,7 +992,7 @@ there is not enough room, you will see only part of it). *info-message* The |--help| and |--version| arguments cause Vim to print a message and then -exit. Normally the message is send to stdout, thus can be redirected to a +exit. Normally the message is sent to stdout, thus can be redirected to a file with: > vim --help >file @@ -1441,7 +1443,7 @@ requires Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv| feature. Filenames are not converted. -MANUALLY READING AND WRITING +MANUALLY READING AND WRITING *viminfo-read-write* Two commands can be used to read and write the viminfo file manually. This can be used to exchange registers between two running Vim programs: First @@ -1504,7 +1506,7 @@ most of the information will be restored). the list is edited. If you get the |press-enter| prompt you can press "q" and still get the prompt to enter a file number. - Use ! to abondon a modified buffer. |abandon| + Use ! to abandon a modified buffer. |abandon| {not when compiled with tiny or small features} vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: diff --git a/runtime/doc/syntax.txt b/runtime/doc/syntax.txt index 6ab0741fb..4b92ac14a 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/syntax.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/syntax.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*syntax.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jul 22 +*syntax.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Dec 19 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -113,6 +113,9 @@ this works, look in the file: :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim Also see |syntax-loading|. +NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting +makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value. + ============================================================================== 2. Syntax files *:syn-files* @@ -198,8 +201,12 @@ that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'. Vim will only load the first syntax file found. -NAMING CONVENTIONS - *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18* +NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18* + +A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of +thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color. +A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself. + The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*" @@ -379,8 +386,8 @@ Or use the ":TOhtml" user command. It is defined in a standard plugin. :10,40TOhtml -After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any HTML viewer, such -as Netscape. The colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. +After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The +colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. To restrict the conversion to a range of lines set "html_start_line" and "html_end_line" to the first and last line to be converted. Example, using @@ -398,15 +405,45 @@ Force to omit the line numbers by using a zero value: > Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: > :unlet html_number_lines -Closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed. If you don't want -this, use the |zR| command before invoking 2html, or use: > - :let html_ignore_folding = 1 - By default, HTML optimized for old browsers is generated. If you prefer using cascading style sheets (CSS1) for the attributes (resulting in considerably shorter and valid HTML 4 file), use: > :let html_use_css = 1 +Closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed. If you don't want +this, use the |zR| command before invoking 2html, or use: > + :let html_ignore_folding = 1 + +You may want to generate HTML that includes all the data within the folds, and +allow the user to view the folded data similar to how they would in Vim. To +generate this dynamic fold information, use: > + :let html_dynamic_folds = 1 + +Using html_dynamic_folds will imply html_use_css, because it would be far too +difficult to do it for old browsers. However, html_ignore_folding overrides +html_dynamic_folds. + +Using html_dynamic_folds will default to generating a foldcolumn in the html +similar to Vim's foldcolumn, that will use javascript to open and close the +folds in the HTML document. The width of this foldcolumn starts at the current +setting of |'foldcolumn'| but grows to fit the greatest foldlevel in your +document. If you do not want to show a foldcolumn at all, use: > + :let html_no_foldcolumn = 1 + +Using this option, there will be no foldcolumn available to open the folds in +the HTML. For this reason, another option is provided: html_hover_unfold. +Enabling this option will use CSS 2.0 to allow a user to open a fold by +hovering the mouse pointer over it. Note that old browsers (notably Internet +Explorer 6) will not support this feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is +included to fall back to the normal CSS1 code so that the folds show up +correctly for this browser, but they will not be openable without a +foldcolumn. Note that using html_hover_unfold will allow modern browsers with +disabled javascript to view closed folds. To use this option, use: > + :let html_hover_unfold = 1 + +Setting html_no_foldcolumn with html_dynamic_folds will automatically set +html_hover_unfold, because otherwise the folds wouldn't be dynamic. + By default "<pre>" and "</pre>" is used around the text. This makes it show up as you see it in Vim, but without wrapping. If you prefer wrapping, at the risk of making some things look a bit different, use: > @@ -525,9 +562,10 @@ files are included: pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84) The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: > - :asmsyntax=nasm + asmsyntax=nasm Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be -one of the first five lines in the file. +one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be +immediately before or after this text. The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the b:asmsyntax variable: > @@ -2529,11 +2567,13 @@ If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable to a larger number: > - :let tcsh_minlines = 100 + :let tcsh_minlines = 1000 -This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first -displayed line. The default value is 15. The disadvantage of using a larger -number is that redrawing can become slow. +This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first +displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then +synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for +tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that +redrawing can become slow. TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* @@ -3414,8 +3454,9 @@ Notes: - The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text. - A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped. -- Until Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters. This - didn't work well for multi-byte characters. +- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters. + This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the + Vim 7.2 release. - The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e. @@ -3466,7 +3507,8 @@ expected, but there are a few exceptions. When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a -following line though. +following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of +the match doesn't move to another line. The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is @@ -3832,10 +3874,11 @@ in their own color. :colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath' for the file "colors/{name}.vim. The first one that is found is loaded. - To see the name of the currently active color scheme - (if there is one): > + To see the name of the currently active color scheme: > :echo g:colors_name -< Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use +< When using the default colors you will get an E121 + error. + Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script. After the color scheme has been loaded the |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered. @@ -4032,7 +4075,7 @@ ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg* colors. When a colorscheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First - delete the "colors_name" variable when you don't want this. + delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this. When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op" diff --git a/runtime/doc/tags b/runtime/doc/tags index cf872e7a0..a36ceb85d 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/tags +++ b/runtime/doc/tags @@ -4,6 +4,8 @@ $ motion.txt /*$* $HOME options.txt /*$HOME* $HOME-use version5.txt /*$HOME-use* +$MYGVIMRC gui.txt /*$MYGVIMRC* +$MYVIMRC starting.txt /*$MYVIMRC* $VIM starting.txt /*$VIM* $VIM-use version5.txt /*$VIM-use* $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* @@ -481,7 +483,6 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* 'nodg' options.txt /*'nodg'* 'nodiff' options.txt /*'nodiff'* 'nodigraph' options.txt /*'nodigraph'* -'nodisable' options.txt /*'nodisable'* 'noea' options.txt /*'noea'* 'noeb' options.txt /*'noeb'* 'noed' options.txt /*'noed'* @@ -518,6 +519,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* 'noimc' options.txt /*'noimc'* 'noimcmdline' options.txt /*'noimcmdline'* 'noimd' options.txt /*'noimd'* +'noimdisable' options.txt /*'noimdisable'* 'noincsearch' options.txt /*'noincsearch'* 'noinf' options.txt /*'noinf'* 'noinfercase' options.txt /*'noinfercase'* @@ -1169,6 +1171,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* +signs various.txt /*+signs* +smartindent various.txt /*+smartindent* +sniff various.txt /*+sniff* ++startuptime various.txt /*+startuptime* +statusline various.txt /*+statusline* +sun_workshop various.txt /*+sun_workshop* +syntax various.txt /*+syntax* @@ -1230,6 +1233,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* --serverlist remote.txt /*--serverlist* --servername remote.txt /*--servername* --socketid starting.txt /*--socketid* +--startuptime starting.txt /*--startuptime* --version starting.txt /*--version* --windowid starting.txt /*--windowid* -A starting.txt /*-A* @@ -1771,6 +1775,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* :Sexplore pi_netrw.txt /*:Sexplore* :TOhtml syntax.txt /*:TOhtml* :Texplore pi_netrw.txt /*:Texplore* +:Untarvim pi_tar.txt /*:Untarvim* :UseVimball pi_vimball.txt /*:UseVimball* :Vexplore pi_netrw.txt /*:Vexplore* :VimballList pi_vimball.txt /*:VimballList* @@ -1781,6 +1786,9 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* :_! cmdline.txt /*:_!* :_# cmdline.txt /*:_#* :_## cmdline.txt /*:_##* +:_#0 cmdline.txt /*:_#0* +:_#< cmdline.txt /*:_#<* +:_#n cmdline.txt /*:_#n* :_% cmdline.txt /*:_%* :_%: cmdline.txt /*:_%:* :_%< cmdline.txt /*:_%<* @@ -1971,7 +1979,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* :command-range map.txt /*:command-range* :command-register map.txt /*:command-register* :command-verbose map.txt /*:command-verbose* -:comment eval.txt /*:comment* +:comment cmdline.txt /*:comment* :comp quickfix.txt /*:comp* :compiler quickfix.txt /*:compiler* :con eval.txt /*:con* @@ -2087,6 +2095,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* :enew! editing.txt /*:enew!* :ex editing.txt /*:ex* :exe eval.txt /*:exe* +:exe-comment eval.txt /*:exe-comment* :execute eval.txt /*:execute* :exi editing.txt /*:exi* :exit editing.txt /*:exit* @@ -2434,6 +2443,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* :nunme gui.txt /*:nunme* :nunmenu gui.txt /*:nunmenu* :o vi_diff.txt /*:o* +:ol starting.txt /*:ol* +:oldfiles starting.txt /*:oldfiles* :om map.txt /*:om* :omap map.txt /*:omap* :omap_l map.txt /*:omap_l* @@ -2862,6 +2873,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME* :unme gui.txt /*:unme* :unmenu gui.txt /*:unmenu* :unmenu-all gui.txt /*:unmenu-all* +:uns various.txt /*:uns* +:unsilent various.txt /*:unsilent* :up editing.txt /*:up* :update editing.txt /*:update* :v repeat.txt /*:v* @@ -4102,7 +4115,15 @@ E805 eval.txt /*E805* E806 eval.txt /*E806* E807 eval.txt /*E807* E808 eval.txt /*E808* +E809 cmdline.txt /*E809* E81 map.txt /*E81* +E810 diff.txt /*E810* +E811 autocmd.txt /*E811* +E812 autocmd.txt /*E812* +E813 editing.txt /*E813* +E814 editing.txt /*E814* +E815 if_mzsch.txt /*E815* +E816 diff.txt /*E816* E82 message.txt /*E82* E83 message.txt /*E83* E84 windows.txt /*E84* @@ -4304,6 +4325,7 @@ Ruby if_ruby.txt /*Ruby* Russian russian.txt /*Russian* S change.txt /*S* SHELL starting.txt /*SHELL* +SQLGetType ft_sql.txt /*SQLGetType* SQLSetType ft_sql.txt /*SQLSetType* Select visual.txt /*Select* Select-mode visual.txt /*Select-mode* @@ -4660,6 +4682,7 @@ blockwise-operators visual.txt /*blockwise-operators* blockwise-register change.txt /*blockwise-register* blockwise-visual visual.txt /*blockwise-visual* bold syntax.txt /*bold* +bom-bytes mbyte.txt /*bom-bytes* book intro.txt /*book* bookmark usr_03.txt /*bookmark* boolean options.txt /*boolean* @@ -4698,6 +4721,11 @@ bzip2 pi_gzip.txt /*bzip2* c change.txt /*c* c.vim syntax.txt /*c.vim* cW change.txt /*cW* +c_# cmdline.txt /*c_#* +c_## cmdline.txt /*c_##* +c_#< cmdline.txt /*c_#<* +c_#n cmdline.txt /*c_#n* +c_% cmdline.txt /*c_%* c_<BS> cmdline.txt /*c_<BS>* c_<C-Left> cmdline.txt /*c_<C-Left>* c_<C-R> cmdline.txt /*c_<C-R>* @@ -4733,6 +4761,7 @@ c_CTRL-B cmdline.txt /*c_CTRL-B* c_CTRL-C cmdline.txt /*c_CTRL-C* c_CTRL-D cmdline.txt /*c_CTRL-D* c_CTRL-E cmdline.txt /*c_CTRL-E* +c_CTRL-F cmdline.txt /*c_CTRL-F* c_CTRL-H cmdline.txt /*c_CTRL-H* c_CTRL-I cmdline.txt /*c_CTRL-I* c_CTRL-J cmdline.txt /*c_CTRL-J* @@ -4773,6 +4802,7 @@ cc change.txt /*cc* ceil() eval.txt /*ceil()* ch.vim syntax.txt /*ch.vim* change-list-jumps motion.txt /*change-list-jumps* +change-name tips.txt /*change-name* change-tabs change.txt /*change-tabs* change.txt change.txt /*change.txt* changed-5.1 version5.txt /*changed-5.1* @@ -4836,6 +4866,7 @@ collapse tips.txt /*collapse* color-xterm syntax.txt /*color-xterm* coloring syntax.txt /*coloring* colortest.vim syntax.txt /*colortest.vim* +command-line-window cmdline.txt /*command-line-window* command-mode intro.txt /*command-mode* compatible-default starting.txt /*compatible-default* compile-changes-5 version5.txt /*compile-changes-5* @@ -5022,6 +5053,7 @@ daw motion.txt /*daw* dd change.txt /*dd* debug-gcc debug.txt /*debug-gcc* debug-highlight debugger.txt /*debug-highlight* +debug-leaks debug.txt /*debug-leaks* debug-minidump debug.txt /*debug-minidump* debug-mode repeat.txt /*debug-mode* debug-scripts repeat.txt /*debug-scripts* @@ -5368,6 +5400,7 @@ foldend-variable eval.txt /*foldend-variable* folding fold.txt /*folding* foldlevel() eval.txt /*foldlevel()* foldlevel-variable eval.txt /*foldlevel-variable* +folds fold.txt /*folds* foldstart-variable eval.txt /*foldstart-variable* foldtext() eval.txt /*foldtext()* foldtextresult() eval.txt /*foldtextresult()* @@ -5512,7 +5545,6 @@ ft-xml-omni insert.txt /*ft-xml-omni* ft-xml-syntax syntax.txt /*ft-xml-syntax* ft-xpm-syntax syntax.txt /*ft-xpm-syntax* ft_ada.txt ft_ada.txt /*ft_ada.txt* -ft_sql.txt ft_sql.txt /*ft_sql.txt* ftdetect filetype.txt /*ftdetect* ftp pi_netrw.txt /*ftp* ftplugin usr_41.txt /*ftplugin* @@ -5544,6 +5576,7 @@ g- undo.txt /*g-* g0 motion.txt /*g0* g8 various.txt /*g8* g:NetrwTopLvlMenu pi_netrw.txt /*g:NetrwTopLvlMenu* +g:Netrw_funcref pi_netrw.txt /*g:Netrw_funcref* g:ada#Comment ft_ada.txt /*g:ada#Comment* g:ada#Ctags_Kinds ft_ada.txt /*g:ada#Ctags_Kinds* g:ada#DotWordRegex ft_ada.txt /*g:ada#DotWordRegex* @@ -5586,14 +5619,17 @@ g:gnat.Tags() ft_ada.txt /*g:gnat.Tags()* g:gnat.Tags_Command ft_ada.txt /*g:gnat.Tags_Command* g:netrw_alto pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_alto* g:netrw_altv pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_altv* +g:netrw_banner pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_banner* g:netrw_browse_split pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_browse_split* g:netrw_browsex_viewer pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_browsex_viewer* +g:netrw_chgperm pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_chgperm* +g:netrw_chgwin pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_chgwin* g:netrw_compress pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_compress* g:netrw_ctags pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_ctags* +g:netrw_cursorline pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_cursorline* g:netrw_cygwin pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_cygwin* g:netrw_dav_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_dav_cmd* g:netrw_decompress pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_decompress* -g:netrw_extracmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_extracmd* g:netrw_fastbrowse pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_fastbrowse* g:netrw_fetch_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_fetch_cmd* g:netrw_fname_escape pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_fname_escape* @@ -5603,10 +5639,13 @@ g:netrw_ftp_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_ftp_cmd* g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd* g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd* g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd* +g:netrw_ftpextracmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_ftpextracmd* g:netrw_ftpmode pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_ftpmode* g:netrw_glob_escape pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_glob_escape* g:netrw_hide pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_hide* +g:netrw_home pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_home* g:netrw_http_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_http_cmd* +g:netrw_http_xcmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_http_xcmd* g:netrw_ignorenetrc pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_ignorenetrc* g:netrw_keepdir pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_keepdir* g:netrw_list_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_list_cmd* @@ -5619,6 +5658,7 @@ g:netrw_localmovecmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_localmovecmd* g:netrw_maxfilenamelen pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_maxfilenamelen* g:netrw_menu pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_menu* g:netrw_mkdir_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_mkdir_cmd* +g:netrw_mousemaps pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_mousemaps* g:netrw_nogx pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_nogx* g:netrw_preview pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_preview* g:netrw_rcp_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_rcp_cmd* @@ -5629,6 +5669,7 @@ g:netrw_rmf_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_rmf_cmd* g:netrw_rsync_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_rsync_cmd* g:netrw_scp_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_scp_cmd* g:netrw_scpport pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_scpport* +g:netrw_sepchr pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_sepchr* g:netrw_sftp_cmd pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_sftp_cmd* g:netrw_silent pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_silent* g:netrw_sort_by pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_sort_by* @@ -5650,6 +5691,8 @@ g:netrw_winsize pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_winsize* g:netrw_xstrlen pi_netrw.txt /*g:netrw_xstrlen* g:tar_browseoptions pi_tar.txt /*g:tar_browseoptions* g:tar_cmd pi_tar.txt /*g:tar_cmd* +g:tar_copycmd pi_tar.txt /*g:tar_copycmd* +g:tar_extractcmd pi_tar.txt /*g:tar_extractcmd* g:tar_nomax pi_tar.txt /*g:tar_nomax* g:tar_readoptions pi_tar.txt /*g:tar_readoptions* g:tar_secure pi_tar.txt /*g:tar_secure* @@ -5657,7 +5700,6 @@ g:tar_writeoptions pi_tar.txt /*g:tar_writeoptions* g:var eval.txt /*g:var* g:vimball_home pi_vimball.txt /*g:vimball_home* g:vimball_mkdir pi_vimball.txt /*g:vimball_mkdir* -g:vimball_path_escape pi_vimball.txt /*g:vimball_path_escape* g:vimsyn_embed syntax.txt /*g:vimsyn_embed* g:vimsyn_folding syntax.txt /*g:vimsyn_folding* g:vimsyn_maxlines syntax.txt /*g:vimsyn_maxlines* @@ -6054,6 +6096,7 @@ i_CTRL-O insert.txt /*i_CTRL-O* i_CTRL-P insert.txt /*i_CTRL-P* i_CTRL-Q insert.txt /*i_CTRL-Q* i_CTRL-R insert.txt /*i_CTRL-R* +i_CTRL-R_= insert.txt /*i_CTRL-R_=* i_CTRL-R_CTRL-O insert.txt /*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-O* i_CTRL-R_CTRL-P insert.txt /*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-P* i_CTRL-R_CTRL-R insert.txt /*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-R* @@ -6228,6 +6271,7 @@ keys() eval.txt /*keys()* known-bugs todo.txt /*known-bugs* l motion.txt /*l* l:var eval.txt /*l:var* +lCursor mbyte.txt /*lCursor* lace.vim syntax.txt /*lace.vim* lang-variable eval.txt /*lang-variable* language-mapping map.txt /*language-mapping* @@ -6483,11 +6527,13 @@ netreadfixup pi_netrw.txt /*netreadfixup* netrw pi_netrw.txt /*netrw* netrw-% pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-%* netrw-- pi_netrw.txt /*netrw--* +netrw-C pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-C* netrw-D pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-D* netrw-O pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-O* netrw-P pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-P* netrw-R pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-R* netrw-S pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-S* +netrw-T pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-T* netrw-U pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-U* netrw-a pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-a* netrw-activate pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-activate* @@ -6505,6 +6551,7 @@ netrw-cadaver pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-cadaver* netrw-chgup pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-chgup* netrw-clean pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-clean* netrw-contents pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-contents* +netrw-copyright pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-copyright* netrw-cr pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-cr* netrw-credits pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-credits* netrw-ctrl-h pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-ctrl-h* @@ -6524,10 +6571,14 @@ netrw-explore pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-explore* netrw-explore-cmds pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-explore-cmds* netrw-externapp pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-externapp* netrw-file pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-file* +netrw-filigree pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-filigree* netrw-fixup pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-fixup* netrw-ftp pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-ftp* +netrw-ftype pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-ftype* netrw-gb pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-gb* +netrw-getftype pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-getftype* netrw-gh pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-gh* +netrw-gp pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-gp* netrw-gx pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-gx* netrw-handler pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-handler* netrw-help pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-help* @@ -6539,10 +6590,12 @@ netrw-horiz pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-horiz* netrw-i pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-i* netrw-incompatible pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-incompatible* netrw-intro-browse pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-intro-browse* +netrw-leftmouse pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-leftmouse* netrw-list pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-list* netrw-listbookmark pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-listbookmark* netrw-listhack pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-listhack* netrw-login pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-login* +netrw-mB pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mB* netrw-mT pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mT* netrw-mb pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mb* netrw-mc pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mc* @@ -6551,8 +6604,10 @@ netrw-me pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-me* netrw-mf pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mf* netrw-mg pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mg* netrw-mh pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mh* +netrw-middlemouse pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-middlemouse* netrw-ml_get pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-ml_get* netrw-mm pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mm* +netrw-mouse pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mouse* netrw-move pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-move* netrw-mp pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mp* netrw-mr pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-mr* @@ -6571,6 +6626,7 @@ netrw-p pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-p* netrw-p1 pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-p1* netrw-p10 pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-p10* netrw-p11 pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-p11* +netrw-p12 pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-p12* netrw-p2 pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-p2* netrw-p3 pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-p3* netrw-p4 pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-p4* @@ -6603,6 +6659,7 @@ netrw-ref pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-ref* netrw-rename pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-rename* netrw-reverse pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-reverse* netrw-rexplore pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-rexplore* +netrw-rightmouse pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-rightmouse* netrw-s pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-s* netrw-settings pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-settings* netrw-sexplore pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-sexplore* @@ -6617,6 +6674,7 @@ netrw-starstarpat pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-starstarpat* netrw-start pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-start* netrw-t pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-t* netrw-texplore pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-texplore* +netrw-todo pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-todo* netrw-transparent pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-transparent* netrw-u pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-u* netrw-uidpass pi_netrw.txt /*netrw-uidpass* @@ -6732,6 +6790,7 @@ object-select motion.txt /*object-select* objects index.txt /*objects* obtaining-exted netbeans.txt /*obtaining-exted* ocaml.vim syntax.txt /*ocaml.vim* +oldfiles-variable eval.txt /*oldfiles-variable* ole-activation if_ole.txt /*ole-activation* ole-eval if_ole.txt /*ole-eval* ole-gethwnd if_ole.txt /*ole-gethwnd* @@ -6852,7 +6911,7 @@ ports-6 version6.txt /*ports-6* posix vi_diff.txt /*posix* posix-compliance vi_diff.txt /*posix-compliance* posix-screen-size vi_diff.txt /*posix-screen-size* -postgres ft_sql.txt /*postgres* +postgress ft_sql.txt /*postgress* postscr.vim syntax.txt /*postscr.vim* postscript-cjk-printing print.txt /*postscript-cjk-printing* postscript-print-encoding print.txt /*postscript-print-encoding* @@ -6889,6 +6948,7 @@ profiling repeat.txt /*profiling* profiling-variable eval.txt /*profiling-variable* progname-variable eval.txt /*progname-variable* progress.vim syntax.txt /*progress.vim* +pronounce intro.txt /*pronounce* psql ft_sql.txt /*psql* ptcap.vim syntax.txt /*ptcap.vim* pterm-mouse options.txt /*pterm-mouse* @@ -7149,6 +7209,7 @@ settabwinvar() eval.txt /*settabwinvar()* setting-guifont gui.txt /*setting-guifont* setting-guitablabel tabpage.txt /*setting-guitablabel* setting-tabline tabpage.txt /*setting-tabline* +setuid change.txt /*setuid* setwinvar() eval.txt /*setwinvar()* sftp pi_netrw.txt /*sftp* sgml.vim syntax.txt /*sgml.vim* @@ -7171,6 +7232,7 @@ simulated-command vi_diff.txt /*simulated-command* sin() eval.txt /*sin()* single-repeat repeat.txt /*single-repeat* skeleton autocmd.txt /*skeleton* +slice eval.txt /*slice* slow-fast-terminal term.txt /*slow-fast-terminal* slow-start starting.txt /*slow-start* slow-terminal term.txt /*slow-terminal* @@ -7195,6 +7257,7 @@ spell spell.txt /*spell* spell-ACCENT spell.txt /*spell-ACCENT* spell-AUTHOR spell.txt /*spell-AUTHOR* spell-BAD spell.txt /*spell-BAD* +spell-BREAK spell.txt /*spell-BREAK* spell-CHECKCOMPOUNDCASE spell.txt /*spell-CHECKCOMPOUNDCASE* spell-CHECKCOMPOUNDDUP spell.txt /*spell-CHECKCOMPOUNDDUP* spell-CHECKCOMPOUNDPATTERN spell.txt /*spell-CHECKCOMPOUNDPATTERN* @@ -7214,6 +7277,7 @@ spell-COMPOUNDMIN spell.txt /*spell-COMPOUNDMIN* spell-COMPOUNDPERMITFLAG spell.txt /*spell-COMPOUNDPERMITFLAG* spell-COMPOUNDROOT spell.txt /*spell-COMPOUNDROOT* spell-COMPOUNDRULE spell.txt /*spell-COMPOUNDRULE* +spell-COMPOUNDRULES spell.txt /*spell-COMPOUNDRULES* spell-COMPOUNDSYLLABLE spell.txt /*spell-COMPOUNDSYLLABLE* spell-COMPOUNDSYLMAX spell.txt /*spell-COMPOUNDSYLMAX* spell-COMPOUNDWORDMAX spell.txt /*spell-COMPOUNDWORDMAX* @@ -7224,6 +7288,7 @@ spell-FOL spell.txt /*spell-FOL* spell-FORBIDDENWORD spell.txt /*spell-FORBIDDENWORD* spell-HOME spell.txt /*spell-HOME* spell-KEEPCASE spell.txt /*spell-KEEPCASE* +spell-KEY spell.txt /*spell-KEY* spell-LANG spell.txt /*spell-LANG* spell-LEMMA_PRESENT spell.txt /*spell-LEMMA_PRESENT* spell-LOW spell.txt /*spell-LOW* @@ -7311,9 +7376,11 @@ sql-object-motions ft_sql.txt /*sql-object-motions* sql-predefined-objects ft_sql.txt /*sql-predefined-objects* sql-type-default ft_sql.txt /*sql-type-default* sql-types ft_sql.txt /*sql-types* +sql.txt ft_sql.txt /*sql.txt* sql.vim syntax.txt /*sql.vim* sqlanywhere ft_sql.txt /*sqlanywhere* sqlanywhere.vim syntax.txt /*sqlanywhere.vim* +sqlgettype ft_sql.txt /*sqlgettype* sqlinformix.vim syntax.txt /*sqlinformix.vim* sqlj ft_sql.txt /*sqlj* sqlserver ft_sql.txt /*sqlserver* @@ -7364,12 +7431,14 @@ sub-menu-priority gui.txt /*sub-menu-priority* sub-replace-\= change.txt /*sub-replace-\\=* sub-replace-expression change.txt /*sub-replace-expression* sub-replace-special change.txt /*sub-replace-special* +sublist eval.txt /*sublist* submatch() eval.txt /*submatch()* subscribe-maillist intro.txt /*subscribe-maillist* substitute() eval.txt /*substitute()* substitute-CR version6.txt /*substitute-CR* suffixes cmdline.txt /*suffixes* suspend starting.txt /*suspend* +swap-exists-choices usr_11.txt /*swap-exists-choices* swap-file recover.txt /*swap-file* swapchoice-variable eval.txt /*swapchoice-variable* swapcommand-variable eval.txt /*swapcommand-variable* @@ -7650,6 +7719,7 @@ tcsh.vim syntax.txt /*tcsh.vim* tear-off-menus gui.txt /*tear-off-menus* telnet-CTRL-] tagsrch.txt /*telnet-CTRL-]* temp-file-name eval.txt /*temp-file-name* +tempfile change.txt /*tempfile* template autocmd.txt /*template* tempname() eval.txt /*tempname()* term-dependent-settings term.txt /*term-dependent-settings* @@ -7818,6 +7888,7 @@ v:lnum eval.txt /*v:lnum* v:mouse_col eval.txt /*v:mouse_col* v:mouse_lnum eval.txt /*v:mouse_lnum* v:mouse_win eval.txt /*v:mouse_win* +v:oldfiles eval.txt /*v:oldfiles* v:operator eval.txt /*v:operator* v:prevcount eval.txt /*v:prevcount* v:profiling eval.txt /*v:profiling* @@ -7942,6 +8013,7 @@ v_x change.txt /*v_x* v_y change.txt /*v_y* v_~ change.txt /*v_~* val-variable eval.txt /*val-variable* +valgrind debug.txt /*valgrind* values() eval.txt /*values()* variables eval.txt /*variables* various various.txt /*various* @@ -8008,6 +8080,7 @@ viminfo-file starting.txt /*viminfo-file* viminfo-file-marks starting.txt /*viminfo-file-marks* viminfo-file-name starting.txt /*viminfo-file-name* viminfo-read starting.txt /*viminfo-read* +viminfo-read-write starting.txt /*viminfo-read-write* viminfo-write starting.txt /*viminfo-write* vimrc starting.txt /*vimrc* vimrc-filetype usr_05.txt /*vimrc-filetype* @@ -8167,6 +8240,7 @@ xterm-function-keys term.txt /*xterm-function-keys* xterm-modifier-keys term.txt /*xterm-modifier-keys* xterm-mouse options.txt /*xterm-mouse* xterm-mouse-wheel scroll.txt /*xterm-mouse-wheel* +xterm-resize term.txt /*xterm-resize* xterm-save-screen tips.txt /*xterm-save-screen* xterm-screens tips.txt /*xterm-screens* xterm-scroll-region term.txt /*xterm-scroll-region* diff --git a/runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt b/runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt index 1267fb153..15ebbd464 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*tagsrch.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 24 +*tagsrch.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Feb 18 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ get an error message. 3. Tag match list *tag-matchlist* *E427* *E428* When there are several matching tags, these commands can be used to jump -between them. Note that these command don't change the tag stack, they keep +between them. Note that these commands don't change the tag stack, they keep the same entry. *:ts* *:tselect* @@ -428,6 +428,10 @@ Emacs style tag files are only supported if Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature enabled. Sorry, there is no explanation about Emacs tag files here, it is only supported for backwards compatibility :-). +Lines in Emacs tags files can be very long. Vim only deals with lines of up +to about 510 bytes. To see whether lines are ignored set 'verbose' to 5 or +higher. + *tags-option* The 'tags' option is a list of file names. Each of these files is searched for the tag. This can be used to use a different tags file than the default diff --git a/runtime/doc/term.txt b/runtime/doc/term.txt index 3df065653..ed308e8bb 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/term.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/term.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*term.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 21 +*term.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 05 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -410,6 +410,21 @@ VT220, etc.). The result is that codes like <xF1> are no longer needed. Note: This is only done on startup. If the xterm options are changed after Vim has started, the escape sequences may not be recognized any more. + *xterm-resize* +Window resizing with xterm only works if the allowWindowOps resource is +enabled. On some systems and versions of xterm it's disabled by default +because someone thought it would be a security issue. It's not clear if this +is actually the case. + +To overrule the default, put this line in your ~/.Xdefaults or +~/.Xresources: +> + XTerm*allowWindowOps: true + +And run "xrdb -merge .Xresources" to make it effective. You can check the +value with the context menu (right mouse button while CTRL key is pressed), +there should be a tick at allow-window-ops. + *termcap-colors* Note about colors: The 't_Co' option tells Vim the number of colors available. When it is non-zero, the 't_AB' and 't_AF' options are used to set the color. diff --git a/runtime/doc/tips.txt b/runtime/doc/tips.txt index 5f83ec50a..e5ae40e00 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/tips.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/tips.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*tips.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Jul 24 +*tips.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 07 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Tips and ideas for using Vim *tips* +These are just a few that we thought would be helpful for many users. +You can find many more tips on the wiki. The URL can be found on +http://www.vim.org + Don't forget to browse the user manual, it also contains lots of useful tips |usr_toc.txt|. @@ -18,11 +22,12 @@ Correcting common typing mistakes |type-mistakes| Counting words, lines, etc. |count-items| Restoring the cursor position |restore-position| Renaming files |rename-files| +Change a name in multiple files |change-name| Speeding up external commands |speed-up| Useful mappings |useful-mappings| Compressing the help files |gzip-helpfile| -Hex editing |hex-editing| Executing shell commands in a window |shell-window| +Hex editing |hex-editing| Using <> notation in autocommands |autocmd-<>| Highlighting matching parens |match-parens| @@ -246,6 +251,8 @@ Breaking up restoring the position: zt scroll to move this line to the top of the window `s jump to the original position of the cursor +For something more advanced see |winsaveview()| and |winrestview()|. + ============================================================================== Renaming files *rename-files* @@ -266,6 +273,25 @@ and I want to rename *.c *.bla. I'd do it like this: > :q! ============================================================================== +Change a name in multiple files *change-name* + +Example for using a script file to change a name in several files: + + Create a file "subs.vim" containing substitute commands and a :update + command: > + :%s/Jones/Smith/g + :%s/Allen/Peter/g + :update +< + Execute Vim on all files you want to change, and source the script for + each argument: > + + vim *.let + argdo source subs.vim + +See |:argdo|. + +============================================================================== Speeding up external commands *speed-up* In some situations, execution of an external command can be very slow. This diff --git a/runtime/doc/todo.txt b/runtime/doc/todo.txt index 81492c0f1..c6e82ad23 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/todo.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/todo.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*todo.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 09 +*todo.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2010 Jan 06 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -30,31 +30,359 @@ be worked on, but only if you sponsor Vim development. See |sponsor|. *known-bugs* -------------------- Known bugs and current work ----------------------- -":pedit %" with a BufReadPre autocommand causes the cursor to move to the -first line. (Ingo Karkat, 2008 Jul 1) Ian Kelling is working on this. +Patch from Dominique Pelle to comment out unused functions. (2009 Dec 25) -Have a look at patch for utf-8 line breaking. (Yongwei Wu, 2008 Mar 1, Mar 23) +Extention for MzScheme interface. (Sergey Khorev, 2009 Dec 21, update Dec 26) + +Patch: :compiler command doesn't function properly when invoked in a function +(Yukihiro Nakadaira) + +iconv() doesn't fail on an illegal character, as documented. (Yongwei Wu, 2009 +Nov 15, example Nov 26) Add argument to specify whether iconv() should fail +or replace with a character and continue? + +Problem with window jumping to other screen when changing font. (patch by +Michael Wookey, 2009 Oct 16) +Better: if the window offset was negative before changing something, then +don't change it. + +Patch to make CTRL-] work on scheme keywords. (Sergey Khorev, 2010 Jan 5) + +has("win64") returns zero. Patch from Sergey Khorev, 2009 Jan 5. +Or define WIN64 when _WIN64 is defined, change all _WIN64 to WIN64. + +Add local time at start of --startuptime output. +Requires configure check for localtime(). +Use format year-month-day hr:min:sec. + +Patch to support netbeans in Unix console Vim. (Xaview de Gaye, 2009 Apr 26) +Now with Mercurial repository (2010 Jan 2) + +Shell not recognized properly if it ends in "csh -f". (James Vega, 2009 Nov 3) +Find tail? Might have a / in argument. Find space? Might have space in +path. + +Crash when assigning s: to variable, pointer becomes invalid later. +(Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2009 Oct 12, confirmed by Dominique Pelle) + +ml_get error when using SiSU syntax. (Nathan Thomas, 2009 Oct 29) + +Coverity: ask someone to create new user: Dominique. +look into reported defects: http://scan.coverity.com/rung2.html + +Bug with 'incsearch' going to wrong line. (Wolfram Kresse, 2009 Aug 17) +Only with "vim -u NONE". + +Problem with editing file in binary mode. (Ingo Krabbe, 2009 Oct 8) + +Support .xz with the xz program, like with lzma. + +Perl runtime files update. (Andy Lester, 2009 Aug 25) + +Gvimext patch to support wide file names. (Szabolcs Horvat 2008 Sep 10) + +Problem with stop directory in findfile(). (Adam Simpkins, 2009 Aug 26) + +Patch to support :browse for more commands. (Lech Lorens, 2009 Jul 18) + +Change to C syntax folding to make it work much faster, but a bit less +reliable. (Lech Lorens, 2009 Nov 9) Enable with an option? +Most time is spent in in_id_list(). + +New wordlist for Dutch: http://www.opentaal.org/bestanden/1_10/nl_NL-Pack + +Check for unused functions, idea: +http://blog.flameeyes.eu/2008/01/17/today-how-to-identify-unused-exported-functions-and-variables + +In command line window ":close" doesn't work properly. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 +Jun 1) + +Why does this give a #705 error: +let X = function('haslocaldir') +let X = function('getcwd') +Inserting "unlet X" helps. + +When a:base in 'completefunc' starts with a number it's passed as a number, +not a string. (Sean Ma) Need to add flag to call_func_retlist() to force a +string value. + +Reproducable crash in syntax HL. (George Reilly, Dominique Pelle, 2009 May 9) + +Invalid read error in Farsi mode. (Dominique Pelle, 2009 Aug 2) + +Patch to add diff functionality to 2html.vim. (Christian Brabandt, 2009 Dec +15) + +For running gvim on an USB stick: avoid the OLE registration. Use a command +line argument -noregister. + +submatch() may remove backslash. (Sergey Goldgaber, 2009 Jul 6) + +Still a problem with ":make" in the wrong directory. Caused by ":bufdo". +(Ajit Thakkar, 2009 Jul 1) More information Jul 9, Jul 15. +Caused by "doautoall syntaxset BufEnter *" in syntax/nosyntax.vim ? +There also is a BufLeave/BufEnter aucmd to save/restore view. +Does the patch to save/restore globaldir work? + +":bufdo normal gg" while 'hidden' is set leaves buffers without syntax +highlighting. Don't disable Syntax autocommands then? Or add a flag/modifier +to avoid changing 'eventignore'? + +Patch for displaying 0x200c and 0x200d. (Ali Gholami Rudi, 2009 May 6) +Probably needs a bit of work. + +List of encoding aliases. (Takao Fujiware, 2009 Jul 18) +Are they all OK? Update Jul 22. + +Patch for Ruby sockets. (todesking/Ariya Mizutani, 2008 Jul 1,24) +Confirmed by Anton Sharonov, 2008 Dec 26. + +Patch for Ruby 1.9. (Msaki Suketa, 2009 Jul 21, Jul 26) + +Patch for completion of ":find" arguments. (Nazri Ramliy, 2009 Feb 22, 26) +8 For ":find" and ":sfind" expand files found in 'path'. +Update 2009 Mar 28. + +Win32: Expanding 'path' runs into a maximum size limit. (bgold12, 2009 Nov 15) + +Setting 'tags' to "tagsdir/*" does not find "tagsdir/tags". (Steven K. Wong, +2009 Jul 18) + +":e dir<Tab>" with 'wildmode' set to "list" doesn't highlight directory names +with a space. (Alexandre Provencio, 2009 Jun 9) + +Patch to add farsi handling to arabic.c (Ali Gholami Rudi, 2009 May 2) +Added test, updates, June 23. + +Patch to add "focusonly" to 'scrollopt', so that scrollbind also applies in +window that doesn't have focus. (Jonathon Mah, 2009 Jan 12) +Needs more work. + +Problem with <script> mappings (Andy Wokula, 2009 Mar 8) + +Patch to support netbeans for Mac. (Kazuki Sakamoto, 2009 Jun 25) + +Patch to support clibpoard for Mac terminal. (Jjgod Jiang, 2009 Aug 1) + +When starting Vim with "gvim -f -u non_existent_file > foo.txt" there are a +few control characters in the output. (Dale Wiles, 2009 May 28) + +'cmdwinheight is only used in last window when 'winheight' is a large value. +(Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Apr 15) + +Status line containing winnr() isn't updated when splitting the window (Clark +J. Wang, 2009 Mar 31) + +Patch for vertical line at certain column position, 'guidecolumn' option. +(Pankaj Garg, 2009 Apr 14, aka Lone, Apr 15) +Update 2009 May 2, 'margincolumn' + +Add different highlighting for a fold line depending on the fold level. +Patch. (Noel Henson, 2009 Sep 13) + +When 'ft' changes redraw custom status line. + +":tab split fname" doesn't set the alternate file in the original window, +because win_valid() always returns FALSE. Below win_new_tabpage() in +ex_docmd.c. + +Space before comma in function defenition not allowed: "function x(a , b)" +Give a more appropriate error message. Add a remark to the docs. + +string_convert() should be able to convert between utf-8 and utf-16le. Used +for GTK clipboard. Avoid requirement for iconv. + +Now that colnr_T is int instead of unsigned, more type casts can be removed. + +'delcombine' does not work for the command line. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Jul +20) + +Unwanted file name escaping: ":echo input('file:' , '', 'file')" +And use file name completion on a file with spaces. (Frederic Hardy, 2009 Mar +23) + +Don't load macmap.vim on startup, turn it into a plugin. (Ron Aaron, +2009 Apr 7) Reminder Apr 14. + +Add "no_hlsearch" to winsaveview(). + +Cursorline highlighting combines with Search ('hlsearch') but not with +SpellBad. (Jim Karsten, 2009 Mar 18) + +When 'foldmethod' is "indent", using >> on a line just above a fold makes the +cursor line folded. (Evan Laforge, 2009 Oct 17) + +When 'foldmethod' is "indent", adding an empty line below a fold and then +indented text, creates a new fold instead of joining it with the previous one. +(Evan Laforge, 2009 Oct 17) + +Bug: When reloading a buffer changed outside of Vim, BufRead autocommands +are applied to the wrong buffer/window. (Ben Fritz, 2009 Apr 2, May 11) +Ignore window options when not in the right window? +Perhaps we need to use a hidden window for applying autocommands to a buffer +that doesn't have a window. + +When using "ab foo bar" and mapping <Tab> to <Esc>, pressing <Tab> after foo +doesn't trigger the abbreviation like <Esc> would. (Ramana Kumar, 2009 Sep 6) + +getbufvar() to get a window-local option value for a buffer that's not +displayed in a window should return the value that's stored for that buffer. + +":he ctrl_u" can be auto-corrected to ":he ctrl-u". + +Patch to make synIDattr() work for GUI attributes in Vim without GUI feature. +(Matt Wozniski, 2009 Apr 15) + +There should be a way after an abbreviation has expanded to go back to what +was typed. CTRL-G h ? Would also undo last word or line break inserted +perhaps. And undo CTRL-W. CTRL-G l would redo. + +Win32: A --remote command that has a directory name starting with a ( doesn't +work, the backslash is removed, assuming that it escapes the (. (Valery +Kondakoff, 2009 May 13) + +Win32 GUI: Changing manifest helps for dpi changes (Joe Castro, 2009 Mar 27) + +Win32: patch for cross compile xxd and GvimExt. (Markus Heidelberg, 2009 Mar +18) Also update INSTALLpc.txt? +Patch for xxd/Make_cyg.mak. (Chris Sutcliffe, 2009 Jun 10) Included in the +above? + +Win32: patch for better font scaling. (George Reilly, 2009 Mar 26) + +Win32 GUI: last message from startup doesn't show up when there is an echoerr +command. (Cyril Slobin, 2009 Mar 13) + +Win32: use different args for SearchPath()? (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2009 Jan 30) + +Win32: completion of file name ":e c:\!test" results in ":e c:\\!test", which +does not work. (Nieko Maatjes, 2009 Jan 8, Ingo Karkat, 2009 Jan 22) + +Directory wrong in session file, caused by ":lcd" in BufEnter autocommand. +(Felix Kater, 2009 Mar 3) + +maparg() doesn't return the flags, such as <buffer>, <script>, <silent>. +These are needed to save and restore a mapping. +Also: the rhs string is not always correct. (Hari Krishna Dara, 2009 Sept 29) + +Using ~ works OK on 'a' with composing char, but not on 0x0418 with composing +char 0x0301. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Mar 4) + +6 In the quickfix window statusline add the command used to get the list of + errors, e.g. ":make foo", ":grep something *.c". + Patch by Lech Lorens, 2009 Mar 23. + Comments from Andreas Bernauer 24th, Dominique Pelle 24th + Docs patch by Dominique Pelle, Mar 25 + Update 2009 Mar 28. + Fix for invalid memory access. (Lech Lorens, 2009 Apr 17) + +Inconsistent: starting with $LANG set to es_ES.utf-8 gives Spanish +messages, even though locale is not supported. But ":lang messages +es_ES.utf-8" gives an error and doesn't switch messages. (Dominique Pelle, +2009 Jan 26) + +When $HOME contains special characters, sich as a comma, escape them when used +in an option. (Michael Hordijk, 2009 May 5) +Turn "esc" argument of expand_env_esc() into string of chars to be escaped. + +Can 'undolevels' be a buffer-local option? Helps for making big changes in +one file only, set 'ul' to -1 only for that buffer. + +Should make 'ignorecase' global-local, so that it makes sense setting it from +a modeline. + +Add cscope target to Makefile. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Jun 18, replies by +Sergey Khorev) + +Consider making YankRing or something else that keeps a list of yanked text +part of standard Vim. The "1 to "9 registers are not sufficient. netrw: dragging status line causes selection of entry. Should check row number to be below last visible line. +Make do_do_join() work faster. Could at least do a binary search way of doing +this. Hint from Dominique Pelle, Dec 10; Lee Naish, Dec 11. +Patch from Milan Vancura, 2008 Dec 22. Update 2009 Jan 7 in two parts. + +After doing "su" $HOME can be the old user's home, thus ~root/file is not +correct. Don't use it in the swap file. + +Completion for ":buf" doesn't work properly on Win32 when 'shellslash' is off. +(Henrik Ohman, 2009, Jan 29) + +Allow patches to add something to version.c, like with an official patch, so +that :version output shows which patches have been applied. + +Have a look at patch for utf-8 line breaking. (Yongwei Wu, 2008 Mar 1, Mar 23) +Now at: http://vimgadgets.sourceforge.net/liblinebreak/ + +Greek sigma character should be lower cased depending on the context. Can we +make this work? (Dominique Pelle, 2009 Sep 24) + +Disable setting 'encoding' from a modeline? It usually causes problems, can't +do any good. (Patch from Patrick Texier, 2008 Dec 9) + +When changing 'encoding' convert all the swap file names, so that we can +still delete them. Also convert all buffer file names? + +"gqip" in Insert mode has an off-by-one error, causing it to reflow text. +(Raul Coronado, 2009 Nov 2) + +Update src/testdir/main.aap. + +"vim -c 'sniff connect'" hangs Vim. (Dominique Pelle, 2008 Dec 7) + +Something wrong with session that has "cd" commands and "badd", in such a way +that Vim doesn't find the edited file in the buffer list, causing the +ATTENTION message? (Tony Mechelynck, 2008 Dec 1) +Also: swap files are in ~/tmp/ One has relative file name ".mozilla/...". + +Add v:motion_force. (Kana Natsuno, 2008 Dec 6) + +Redraw problem when appending digraph causes line to wrap. (James Vega, 2007 +Sep 18) Patch by Ian Kelling, 2008 Aug 8. + Runtime files for Clojure. (Toralf Wittner, 2008 Jun 25) -Patch to add extra argument to glob() and globpath() to ignore 'wildignore'. -(Ingo Karkat, 2008 Jun 25) +MS-Windows: editing the first, empty buffer, 'ffs' set to "unix,dos", ":enew" +doesn't set 'ff' to "unix". (Ben Fritz, 2008 Dec 5) Reusing the old buffer +probably causes this. + +'scrollbind' is not respected when deleting lines or undo. (Milan Vancura, +1009 Jan 16) + +Document that default font in Athena can be set with resources: + XtDefaultFont: "9x15" + XtDefaultFontSet: "9x15" +(Richard Sherman, 2009 Apr 12) + +Having "Syntax" in 'eventignore' for :bufdo may cause problems, e.g. for +":bufdo e" when buffers are open in windows. ex_listdo(eap) could set the +option only for when jumping to another buffer, not when the command argument +is executed. Crash with dragn-n-drop of file combined with netrw (Marius Gedminas, 2008 Jun 11) I can't reproduce it. It's probably caused by a handle_drop() call in combination with autocommands that invoke a ":redraw" command. Another valgrind output Jun 30. -When reallocating cmdline xp_pattern becomes invalid. Move expand_T xpc into -ccline? (Dominique Pelle) +":pedit %" with a BufReadPre autocommand causes the cursor to move to the +first line. (Ingo Karkat, 2008 Jul 1) Ian Kelling is working on this. Wildmenu not deleted: "gvim -u NONE", ":set nocp wildmenu cmdheight=3 laststatus=2", CTRL-D CTRL-H CTRL-H CTRL-H. (A.Politz, 2008 April 1) Works OK with Vim in an xterm. +Cursor line moves in other window when using CTRL-W J that doesn't change +anything. (Dasn, 2009 Apr 7) + +On Unix "glob('does not exist~')" returns the string. Without the "~" it +doesn't. (John Little, 2008 Nov 9) +Shell expansion returns unexpanded string? +Don't use shell when "~" is not at the start? + +":unlet $VAR" doesn't work. + When using ":e ++enc=foo file" and the file is already loaded with 'fileencoding' set to "bar", then do_ecmd() uses that buffer, even though the fileencoding differs. Reload the buffer in this situation? Need to check for @@ -62,8 +390,24 @@ the buffer to be unmodified. Unfinished patch by Ian Kelling, 2008 Jul 11. Followup Jul 14, need to have another look at it. +Patch for c.vim and cpp.vim syntax files. (Chung-chieh Shan, 2008 Nov 26) + +c.vim: XXX in a comment is colored yellow, but not when it's after "#if 0". +(Ilya Dogolazky, 2009 Aug 7) + +Win32: ":dis +" shows nothing, but "+p does insert text. Problem with "* and +"+ being the same thing? + +You can type ":w ++bad=x fname", but the ++bad argument is ignored. Give an +error message? Or is this easy to implement? (Nathan Stratton Treadway, 2008 +Aug 20) This is in ucs2bytes(), search for 0xBF. Using the ++bad argument is +at the other match for 0xBF. + Fix for matchparen HL doesn't work. beep. +When adding "-complete=file" to a user command this also changes how the +argument is processed for <f-args>. (Ivan Tishchenko, 2008 Aug 19) + Win32: associating a type with Vim doesn't take care of space after a backslash? (Robert Vibrant, 2008 Jun 5) @@ -74,13 +418,41 @@ command is not executed. Fix by Ian Kelling? ":help s/~" jumps to *s/\~*, while ":help s/\~" doesn't find anything. (Tim Chase) Fix by Ian Kelling, 2008 Jul 14. +":colorscheme" without arguments should echo the current color scheme name. + +After using ":recover" or recovering a file in another way, ":x" doesn't save +what you see. Mark the buffer as modified? Only when the text is actually +different from the original file? + +Use "\U12345678" for 32 bit Unicode characters? (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 +Apr 6) Or use "\u(123456)", similar to Perl. + +When mapping : to ; and ; to :, @; doesn't work like @: and @: doesn't work +either. Matt Wozniski: nv_at() calls do_execreg() which uses +put_in_typebuf(). Char mapped twice? + +Patch for colorscheme submenu. (Juergen Kraemer, 2008 Aug 20) + +Patch for Python 3 support. (Roland Puntaier, 2009 Sep 22) +Includes changes for omnicompletion. +Needs to be tested. + +8 Some file systems are case-sensitive, some are not. Turn + CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME into an option, at least for completion. + +9 Make it possible to drag a tab page label to another position with the + mouse. +Patch by Paul B. Mahol, 2008 Aug 29. + Despite adding save_subexpr() this still doesn't work properly: Regexp: matchlist('12a4aaa', '^\(.\{-}\)\(\%5c\@<=a\+\)\(.\+\)\?') Returns ['12a4', 'aaa', '4aaa'], should be ['12a4', 'aaa', ''] Backreference not cleared when retrying after \@<= fails? (Brett Stahlman, 2008 March 8) -Patch for 2html.vim to avoid "&nbsp;". (Markus Heidelberg, 2008 Jul 19) +Problem with remote_send(). (Charles Campbell, 2008 Aug 12) + +ftplugin for help file should set 'isk' to help file value. Win32: remote editing fails when the current directory name contains "[". (Ivan Tishchenko, Liu Yubao) Suggested patch by Chris Lubinski: Avoid @@ -89,6 +461,9 @@ an alternate solution, also for src/ex_getln.c. This also fails when the file or directory name contains "%". (Thoml, 2008 July 7) +Win32: The "4913" file is sometimes not deleted. Perhaps another program has +opened it? Use FILE_FLAG_DELETE_ON_CLOSE? (Craig Barkhouse, 2009 Nov 6) + The str2special() function doesn't handle multi-byte characters properly. Patch from Vladimir Vichniakov, 2007 Apr 24. Should clean up the whole function. Also allow modifiers like <S-Char-32>? @@ -102,9 +477,14 @@ Problem with CTRL-F. (Charles Campbell, 2008 March 21) Only happens with "gvim -geometry "160x26+4+27" -u NONE -U NONE prop.c". 'lines' is 54. (2008 March 27) +Problem with pointer wrapping around in getvcol(). (Wolfgang Kroworsch, 2008 +Oct 19) Check for "col" being "MAXCOL" separately? + Unexpectedly inserting a double quote. (Anton Woellert, 2008 Mar 23) Works OK when 'cmdheight' is 2. +Test54 should not use shell commands. Make it portable. + The utf class table is missing some entries: 0x2212, minus sign 0x2217, star @@ -117,6 +497,12 @@ line doesn't fit. (Dasn, 2008 May 1) GUI: In Normal mode can't yank the modeless selection. Make "gy" do this? Works like CTRL-Y in Command line mode. +Mac: Move Carbon todo items to os_mac.txt. Note that this version is frozen, +try the Cocoa version. + +Mac: Patch to disable antialias. (LC Mi, 2008 Aug 23) Tested on 10.5 and +10.4. + Mac: After a ":vsplit" the left scrollbar doesn't appear until 'columns' is changed or the window is resized. @@ -134,12 +520,37 @@ C't: On utf-8 system, editing file with umlaut through Gnome results in URL with %nn%nn, which is taken as two characters instead of one. Try to reproduce at work. +Patch for default choice in file changed dialog. (Bjorn Winckler, 2008 Oct 19) +Is there a way to list all the files first? + +When 'smartcase' is set and using CTRL-L to add to the search pattern it may +result in no matches. Convert chars to lower case? (Erik Wognsen, 2009 Apr +16) + Patch for redo register. (Ben Schmidt, 2007 Oct 19) Await response to question to make the register writable. +src/testdir/Make_dos.mak: not all tests are included, e.g., test49, without a +remark why. + Problem with 'ts' set to 9 and 'showbreak' to ">>>". (Matthew Winn, 2007 Oct 1) +In the swapfile dialog, add a H(elp) option that gives more info about what +each choice does. Similar to ":help swap-exists-choices" + +try/catch not working for argument of return. (Matt Wozniski, 2008 Sep 15) + +Recognize and ignore BOM in error file. (Aleksey Baibarin) + +":tab help" always opens a new tab, while ":help" re-uses an existing window. +Would be more consistent when an existing tab is re-used. (Tony Mechelynck) + +":tab drop filename" doesn't work nicely when "filename" is open in a window +in another tab. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Feb 13) + +Add ":nofold". Range will apply without expanding to closed fold. + Including NFA regexp code: Use "\%#= to set the engine: 0 = automatic, 1 = backtracking, 2 = new. Useful in tests. @@ -147,6 +558,7 @@ Performance tests: - ~/vim/test/veryslow.js (file from Daniel Fetchinson) - ~/vim/test/slowsearch - ~/vim/test/rgb.vim +- ~/vim/text/FeiqCfg.xml (file from Netjune) - search for a.*e*exn in the vim executable. Go to last line to use 'hlsearch'. @@ -160,6 +572,9 @@ Jul 31) C syntax: {} inside () causes following {} to be highlighted as error. (Michalis Giannakidis, 2006 Jun 1) +Can't easily close the help window, like ":pc" closes the preview window and +":ccl" closes the quickfix window. Add ":hclose". (Chris Gaal) + When 'diffopt' has "context:0" a single deleted line causes two folds to merge and mess up syncing. (Austin Jennings, 2008 Jan 31) @@ -168,13 +583,24 @@ Gnome improvements: Edward Catmur, 2007 Jan 7 New PHP syntax file, use it? (Peter Hodge) +Patch go make gui highlight settings work in Vim without +gui feature. +(Matt Wozniski, 2009 Mar 27) + 'foldcolumn' in modeline applied to wrong window when using a session. (Teemu Likonen, March 19) +Test 54 uses shell commands, that doesn't work on non-Unix systems. Use some +other way to test buffer-local autocommands. + The documentation mentions the priority for ":2match" and ":3match", but it appears the last one wins. (John Beckett, 2008 Jul 22) Caused by adding matchadd()? Suggested patch by John, 2008 Jul 24. +When 'encoding' is utf-8 the command line is redrawn as a whole on every +character typed. (Tyler Spivey, 2008 Sep 3) Only redraw cmdline for +'arabicshape' when there is a character on the command line for which +(ARABIC_CHAR(u8c)) is TRUE. + Replace ccomplete.vim by cppcomplete.vim from www.vim.org? script 1520 by Vissale Neang. (Martin Stubenschrott) Asked Vissale to make the scripts more friendly for the Vim distribution. @@ -192,9 +618,6 @@ Suggestion by Ben Schmidt, 2008 Aug 6. Problem with compound words? (Bert, 2008 May 6) No warning for when flags are defined after they are used in an affix. -With Visual selection, "r" and then CTRL-C Visual mode is stopped but the -highlighting is not removed. - Screen redrawing when continuously updating the buffer and resizing the terminal. (Yakov Lerner, 2006 Sept 7) @@ -206,6 +629,9 @@ that may fail (e.g., sizeof(int)). (Blaine, 2007 Aug 21) When opening quickfix window, disable spell checking? +Problem with ".add" files when using two languages and restarting Vim. (Raul +Coronado, 2008 Oct 30) + Popup menu redraw: Instead of first redrawing the text and then drawing the popup menu over it, first draw the new popup menu, remember its position and size and then redraw the text, skipping the characters under the popup menu. @@ -214,13 +640,13 @@ This should avoid flicker. Other solution by A.Politz, 2007 Aug 22. When the popup menu is close to the edge of the window it is truncated. Patch to anchor the popup menu in a different way. (James Vega, 2008 Jul 30) -Spell checking: Add a way to specify punctuation characters. Add the -superscript numbers by default: 0x2070, 0xb9, 0xb2, 0xb3, 0x2074 - 0x2079. - Windows 98: pasting from the clipboard with text from another application has a trailing NUL. (Joachim Hofmann) Perhaps the length specified for CF_TEXT isn't right? +When a register contains illegal bytes, writing viminfo in utf-8 and reading +it back doesn't result in utf-8. (Devin Bayer) + Command line completion: Scanning for tags doesn't check for typed key now and then? Hangs for about 5 seconds. Appears to be caused by finding include files with "foo/**" in 'path'. (Kalisiak, 2006 July 15) @@ -239,6 +665,9 @@ Jun 3) However, for backwards compatibility escaping might be necessary. Check if the user put quotes around the expanded item? +Error E324 can be given when a cron script has wiped out our temp directory. +Give a clear error message about this (and tell them not to wipe out /tmp). + Color for cUserLabel should differ from case label, so that a mistake in a switch list is noticed: switch (i) @@ -254,23 +683,21 @@ with "gvim -nb:localhost:55555:foo". From nc do: '1:editFile!0 "foo"'. Then go to Insert mode and add a few lines. Then backspacing every other time moves the cursor instead of deleting. (Chris Kaiser, 2007 Sep 25) -Redraw problem when appending digraph causes line to wrap. (James Vega, 2007 -Sep 18) Patch by Ian Kelling, 2008 Aug 8. - Changes for Win32 makefile. (Mike Williams, 2007 Jan 22, Alexei Alexandrov, 2007 Feb 8) Patch for Win32 clipboard under Cygwin. (Frodak Baksik, Feb 15) Sutcliffe says it works well. Update 2007 May 22 for Vim 7.1 + Update 2008 Dec 2008 for Vim 7.2.xx (Sharonov) + +Win32: Can't complete shell command names. Why is setting xp_context in +set_one_cmd_context() inside #ifndef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME? Win32: Patch for convert_filterW(). (Taro Muraoka, 2007 Mar 2) Win32: Patch for cscope external command. (Mike Williams, 2007 Aug 7) -":cscope find f filename" doesn't work because of the extra space. (Ethan -Mallove) - Win32: XPM support only works with path without spaces. Patch by Mathias Michaelis, 2006 Jun 9. Another patch for more path names, 2006 May 31. New version: http://members.tcnet.ch/michaelis/vim/patches.zip (also for other @@ -292,9 +719,6 @@ Patch by Alex Dobrynin, 2007 Jun 3. Also fixes other scroll wheel problems. Win32: using CTRL-S in Insert mode doesn't remove the "+" from the tab pages label. (Tsakiridis, 2007 Feb 18) Patch from Ian Kelling, 2008 Aug 6. -When 'bomb' is changed the window title is updated to show/hide a "+", but the -tab page label isn't. (Patrick Texier, 2008 Jun 24) - Win32: using "gvim --remote-tab-silent fname" sometimes gives an empty screen with the more prompt. Caused by setting the guitablabel? (Thomas Michael Engelke, 2007 Dec 20 - 2008 Jan 17) @@ -307,9 +731,28 @@ pointer in long and seek offset in 64 bit var. Win32: patch for fullscreen mode. (Liushaolin, 2008 April 17) +Win32: When 'shell' is cmd.exe this command fails: + echo system('"c:/path/echo.exe" "foo bar"') +Should we set the default for 'shellxquote' to a double quote, when 'shell' +contains "cmd" in the tail? (Benjamin Fritz, 2008 Oct 13) +Also set 'shellcmdflag' to include /s. + +Win32: When there is 4 Gbyte of memory mch_avail_mem() doesn't work properly. +Unfished patch by Jelle Geerts, 2008 Aug 24. +Let mch_avail_mem() return Kbyte instead? + +Win32: With two monitors, gvim partly on both, and adding/removing a scrollbar +Vim resizes and moves to one of the monitors. (Chris Monkiewicz, 2008 Oct) + +Win32: When 'shell' is bash shellescape() doesn't always do the right thing. +Depends on 'shellslash', 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote', but shellescape() +only takes 'shellslash' into account. + When file b is a link to file a and editing b twice you get the correct warning for existing swap file, but when trying to recover it doesn't find the -swapfile. (Matt Wozniski, 2008 Aug 5) +swapfile. (Matt Wozniski, 2008 Aug 5) Patch by Ian Kelling, 2008 Aug 11. +Another patch by James Vega, 2008 Aug 20, again 2008 Sep 3. +Also solves: Problem finding swap file for recovery. (Gautam Iyer, 2006 May 16) Pressing the 'pastetoggle' key doesn't update the statusline. (Jan Christoph Ebersbach, 2008 Feb 1) @@ -327,12 +770,16 @@ Jun 18) If the variable "g:x#y#z" exists completion after ":echo g:x#" doesn't work. +Feature request: Command to go to previous tab, like what CTRL-W p does for +windows. (Adam George) + +When using input() in a loop and then ":echo" the display column isn't right. +(Benjamin Fritz, 2008 Aug 28) Patch by Ben Schmidt, 2008 Sep 2. + F1 - F4 in an xterm produce a different escape sequence when used with a modifier key. Need to catch three different sequences. Use K_ZF1, like K_ZHOME? (Dickey, 2007 Dec 2) -Problem finding swap file for recovery. (Gautam Iyer, 2006 May 16) - UTF-8: mapping a multi-byte key where the second byte is 0x80 doesn't appear to work. (Tony Mechelynck, 2007 March 2) @@ -352,13 +799,11 @@ use a different dialog: "busy saving, really quit? yes / no". Check other interfaces for changing curbuf in a wrong way. Patch like for if_ruby.c. -Problem with cursorcolumn highlighting and folds. (John Mullin, 2008 Jul 18) - -Spell checking in popup menu: If the only problem is the case of the first -character, don't offer "ignore" and "add to word list". - ":helpgrep" should use the directory from 'helpfile'. +Patch to dynamically load Python on Solaris. (Danek Duvall, 2009 Feb 16) +Needs more work. + The need_fileinfo flag is messy. Instead make the message right away and put it in keep_msg? @@ -369,7 +814,10 @@ name literally, and esp. if there is only one name. Test 61 fails sometimes. This is a timing problem: "sleep 2" sometimes takes longer than 2 seconds. -Changing 'guifont' in the console causes an unnecessary redraw. +Using ":au CursorMoved * cmd" invokes mch_FullName(), which can be slow. +Can this be avoided? (Thomas Waba, 2008 Aug 24) +Also for ":w" without a file name. +The buffer has the full path in ffname, should pass this to the autocommand. "vim -C" often has 'nocompatible', because it's set in some startup script. Set 'compatible' after startup is done? Patch by James Vega, 2008 Feb 7. @@ -393,11 +841,18 @@ When 'backupskip' is set from $TEMP special characters need to be escaped. Another problem is that file_pat_to_reg_pat() doesn't recognize "\\", so "\\(" will be seen as a path separator plus "\(". +When doing ":quit" the Netbeans "killed" event isn't sent. (Xavier de Gaye, +2008 Nov 10) call netbeans_file_closed() at the end of buf_freeall(), or in +all places where buf_freeall() is called? + ":python os.chdir('/tmp')" makes short buffer names invalid. (Xavier de Gaye) Check directory and call shorten_fnames()? aucmd_prepbuf() should also use a window in another tab page. +When unloading a buffer in a BufHidden autocommand the hidden flag is reset? +(Bob Hiestand, 2008 Aug 26, Aug 27) + Substituting an area with a line break with almost the same area does change the Visual area. Can this be fixed? (James Vega, 2006 Sept 15) @@ -409,13 +864,33 @@ argument list or opening each file in a separate tab. GUI: When combining fg en bg make sure they are not equal. +Spell checking: Add a way to specify punctuation characters. Add the +superscript numbers by default: 0x2070, 0xb9, 0xb2, 0xb3, 0x2074 - 0x2079. + +Spell checking in popup menu: If the only problem is the case of the first +character, don't offer "ignore" and "add to word list". + Use different pt_br dictionary for spell checking. (Jackson A. Aquino, 2006 Jun 5) +Use different romanian dictionary for spell checking. (Andrei Popescu, Nov +2008) Use http://downloads.sourceforge.net/rospell/ro_RO.3.2.zip +Or the hunspell-ro.3.2.tar.gz file, it also has a iso-8859-2 list. + +In a C file with spell checking, in "% integer" "nteger" is seen as an error, +but "]s" doesn't find it. "nteger" by itself is found. (Ralf Wildenhues, 2008 +Jul 22) + +There should be something about spell checking in the user manual. + +Spell menu: When using the Popup menu to select a replacement word, +":spellrepeat" doesn't work. SpellReplace() uses setline(). Can it use "z=" +somehow? Or use a new function. + Mac: Using gvim: netrw window disappears. (Nick Lo, 2006 Jun 21) -When 'ff' is "mac" then "ga" on a ^J shows 0x0d instead of 0x0a. Compare with -using "ga" on a NUL when 'ff' is "unix". (Andy Wokula, 2008 Jul 16) +Mac: OS/X 10.4 with Python 2.5 installed: configure finds an extra argument +that breaks the build. (Brian Victor, 2008 Sep 1) Add an option to specify the character to use when a double-width character is moved to the next line. Default '>', set to a space to blank it out. Check @@ -423,13 +898,13 @@ that char is single width when it's set (compare with 'listchars'). The generated vim.bat can avoid the loop for NT. (Carl Zmola, 2006 Sep 3) -In a C file with spell checking, in "% integer" "nteger" is seen as an error, -but "]s" doesn't find it. "nteger" by itself is found. (Ralf Wildenhues, 2008 -Jul 22) - Session file creation: 'autochdir' causes trouble. Keep it off until after loading all files. +Win32: When 'autochdir' is on and 'encoding' is changed, files on the command +line are opened again, but from the wrong directory. Apply 'autochdir' only +after starting up? + When showing a diff between a non-existant file and an existing one, with the cursor in the empty buffer, the other buffer only shows the last line. Change the "insert" into a change from one line to many? (Yakov Lerner, 2008 May 27) @@ -443,10 +918,6 @@ fly. A bit like "!make > file&" and repeating ":cf file". ":bgmake", background make. ":bgcancel" interrupts it. A.Politz may work on this. -The spellfile plugin checks for a writable "spell" directory. A user may have -a writable runtime directory without a "spell" directory, it could be created -then. - These two abbreviations don't give the same result: let asdfasdf = "xyz\<Left>" cabbr XXX <C-R>=asdfasdf<CR> @@ -489,6 +960,10 @@ dying? Also relevant when running in a console. Accessing file#var in a function should not need the g: prepended. +When exiting detects a modified buffer, instead of opening the buffer in the +current tab, use an existing tab, if possible. Like finding a window where +the buffer is displayed. (Antonios Tsakiridis) + When ":cn" moves to an error in the same line the message isn't shortened. Only skip shortening for ":cc"? @@ -509,21 +984,9 @@ Wokula, 2007 Aug 25) Problem with using :redir in user command completion function? (Hari Krishna Dara, 2006 June 21) -GTK: When maximizing Vim the result is slightly smaller, the filler border is -not there, and the "maximize" button is still there. Clicking it again does -give a maximized window. (Darren Hiebert) -Problem is that gui_mch_set_text_area_pos() is invoked to change the text area -size, which causes the toplevel window to resize. When doing this while the -size is already right the filler remains there. -Detect using the maximize button (GdkWindowState bit -GDK_WINDOW_STATE_MAXIMIZED) and set it again? - Another resizing problem when setting 'columns' and 'lines' to a very large number. (Tony Mechelynck, 2007 Feb 6) -GTK: when using the -geom argument with an offset from the right edge and the -size is smaller than the default, the Vim window is not positioned properly. - After starting Vim, using '0 to jump somewhere in a file, ":sp" doesn't center the cursor line. It works OK after some other commands. @@ -531,8 +994,6 @@ Win32: Is it possible to have both postscript and Win32 printing? Does multi-byte printing with ":hardcopy" work? Add remark in documentation about this. -There should be something about spell checking in the user manual. - Check: Running Vim in a console and still having connect to the X server for copy/paste: is stopping the X server handled gracefully? Should catch the X error and stop using the connection to the server. @@ -540,18 +1001,37 @@ error and stop using the connection to the server. Problem with 'cdpath' on MS-Windows when a directory is equal to $HOME. (2006 Jul 26, Gary Johnson) +Using UTF-8 character with ":command" does not work properly. (Matt Wosniski, +2008 Sep 29) + In the Netbeans interface add a "vimeval" function, so that the other side can check the result of has("patch13"). +Cursor line at bottom of window instead of halfway after saving view and +restoring. Only with 'nowrap'. (Robert Webb, 2008 Aug 25) + Add command modifier that skips wildcard expansion, so that you don't need to put backslashes before special chars, only for white space. +Syntax HL: open two windows on the same C code, delete a ")" in one window, +resulting in highlighted "{" in that window, not in the other. + +In mswin.vim: Instead of mapping <C-V> for Insert mode in a complicated way, +can it be done like ":imap <C-V> <MiddleMouse>" without negative side effects? + Win32: When the GUI tab pages line is displayed Vim jumps from the secondary to the primary monitor. (Afton Lewis, 2007 Mar 9) Old resizing problem? GTK: when the Tab pages bar appears or disappears while the window is maximized the window is no longer maximized. Patch that has some idea but doesn't work from Geoffrey Antos, 2008 May 5. +Also: the window may no longer fit on the screen, thus the command line is not +visible. + +GTK: when setting 'columns' in a startup script and doing ":vertical diffsplit" +the window isn't redrawn properly, see two vertical bars. + +GTK: file choser is disabled. Patch by Tim Starling, 2009 Nov 13. The magic clipboard format "VimClipboard2" appears in several places. Should be only one. @@ -610,10 +1090,6 @@ Is it possible to use "foo#var" instead of "g:foo#var" inside a function? Syntax HL: When using "nextgroup" and the group has an empty match, there is no search at that position for another match. (Lukas Mai, 2008 April 11) -Spell menu: When using the Popup menu to select a replacement word, -":spellrepeat" doesn't work. SpellReplace() uses setline(). Can it use "z=" -somehow? Or use a new function. - In gvim the backspace key produces a backspace character, but on Linux the VERASE key is Delete. Set VERASE to Backspace? (patch by Stephane Chazelas, 2007 Oct 16) @@ -628,17 +1104,51 @@ Patch for supporting #rrggbb in color terminals. (Matt Wozniski) Create a gvimtutor.1 file and change Makefiles to install it. +When 'encoding' is utf-8 typing text at the end of the line causes previously +typed characters to be redrawn. Caused by patch 7.1.329. (Tyler Spivey, 2008 +Sep 3, 11) + +When Vim in an xterm owns the selection and the user does ":shell" Vim doesn't +respond to selection requests. Invoking XtDisownSelection() before executing +the shell doesn't help. Would require forking and doing a message loop, like +what happens for the GUI. + +X11: Putting more than about 262040 characters of text on the clipboard and +pasting it in another Vim doesn't work. (Dominique Pelle, 2008 Aug 21-23) +clip_x11_request_selection_cb() is called with zero value and length. +Also: Get an error message from free() in the process that owns the selection. +Seems to happen when the selection is requested the second time, but before +clip_x11_convert_selection_cb() is invoked, thus in X library code. + +Add 'lazysize' option: Above this size Vim doesn't load everything before +starting to edit a file. Things like 'fileencodings' only work up to this +size, modelines only work at the top. Useful for large log files where you +only want to look at the first few pages. Use zero to disable it. + +":vimgrep" does not recognize a recursive symlink. Is it possible to detect +this, at least for Unix (using device/inode)? + +When switching between windows the cursor is often put in the middle. +Remember the relative position and restore that, just like lnum and col are +restored. (Luc St-Louis) + Vim 7.3: +- Use latest autoconf (3.64) +- Use NSIS 2.45, it includes Windows 7 support. +- Include all files in distro, no "extra" and "lang" package. +- Create Mercurial repository. +- Easier/standard way to disable default plugins. - Add patch for 'relativenumber' option? Markus Heidelberg, 2008 Jun 27. - Add blowfish encryption. Openssl has an implementation. Also by Paul Kocher (LGPL), close to original. Mohsin also has some ideas. Take four bytes and turn them into unsigned to avoid byte-order problems. Need to buffer up to 7 bytes to align on 8 byte boundaries. -- ":{range}source": source the lines from the file. +- ":{range}source": source the lines from the current file. You can already yank lines and use :@" to execute them. Most of do_source() would not be used, need a new function. It's easy when not doing breakpoints or profiling. +- Patch for Lisp support with ECL (Mikael Jansson, 2008 Oct 25) More patches: @@ -669,6 +1179,10 @@ More patches: vimtutor.vim. (Jan Minar, 2008 Jul 20) - When fsync() fails there is no hint about what went wrong. Patch by Ben Schmidt, 2008 Jul 22. +- testdir/Make_dos_sh.mak for running tests with MingW. (Bill Mccarthy, 2008 + Sep 13) +- Patch for adding "space" item in 'listchars'. (Jérémie Roquet, 2009 Oct 29, + Docs patch Oct 30) Awaiting updated patches: @@ -693,6 +1207,7 @@ Awaiting updated patches: How does this work? Missing comments. - Patch for 'breakindent' option: repeat indent for wrapped line. (Vaclav Smilauer, 2004 Sep 13, fix Oct 31, update 2007 May 30) + Version for latest MacVim: Tobia Conforto, 2009 Nov 23 8 Add a few more command names to the menus. Patch from Jiri Brezina (28 feb 2002). Will mess the translations... 7 ATTENTION dialog choices are more logical when "Delete it' appears @@ -1220,8 +1735,6 @@ Macintosh: 8 ":gui" doesn't fork. Enabling the code in gui.c to fork causes a SEGV. 8 Define vim_mkdir() for Macintosh. 8 Define mch_writable() for Macintosh. -8 Some file systems are case-sensitive, some are not. Turn - CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME into an option, at least for completion. 9 When DiskLock is running, using a swap file causes a crash. Appears to be a problem with writing a file that starts with a dot. (Giacalone) 9 On G3 Mac, OS version 8, control strip causes characters messed up when @@ -1238,6 +1751,13 @@ Macintosh: CTRL-Q. Add an option for it? - When using e_secure in do_one_cmd() mention the command being executed, otherwise it's not clear where it comes from. +- When the quickfix window is open and executing ":echo 'hello'" using the + Command-line window, the text is immediately removed by the redrawing. + (Michael Henry, 2008 Nov 1) + Generic solution: When redrawing while there is a message on the + cmdline, don't erase the display but draw over the existing text. + Other solution, redraw after closing the cmdline window, before executing + the command. 9 For Turkish vim_tolower() and vim_toupper() also need to use utf_ functions for characters below 0x80. (Sertacyildiz) 9 When the last edited file is a help file, using '0 in a new Vim doesn't @@ -1383,8 +1903,6 @@ Macintosh: 8 With 'virtualedit' set and 'selection' "exclusive", a Visual selection that ends in or after a tab, "d" doesn't delete (part of) the tab. (Helmut Stiegler) -8 With 'virtualedit' set, a blockwise Visual selection that starts and ends - in a tab, "<" shifts too much. (Helmut Stiegler) 9 When jumping to a tag, the search pattern is put in the history. When 'magic' is on, the pattern may not work. Translate the pattern depending on p_magic when putting it in the history? Alternative: Store value of @@ -1615,7 +2133,12 @@ Problems that will (probably) not be solved: --------------------- extensions and improvements ---------------------- *extensions-improvements* -Didn't make it into Vim 7.0: +Most interesting new features to be added when all bugs have been fixed: +- Using ":exe edit fname" has escaping problems. Use ":edit ++(fname)". + Thus use "++=" to give arguments as expressions, comma separated as if + calling a function. + With options: ":edit ++(['!', '++enc=abc'], ['+/pat'], fname)". + Alternative: Make a function for Ex commands: cmd_edit(). - Add COLUMN NUMBERS to ":" commands ":line1,line2[col1,col2]cmd". Block can be selected with CTRL-V. Allow '$' (end of line) for col2. - Add DEBUGGER INTERFACE. Implementation for gdb by Xavier de Gaye. @@ -1640,10 +2163,13 @@ Didn't make it into Vim 7.0: - STICKY CURSOR: Add a way of scrolling that leaves the cursor where it is. Especially when using the scrollbar. Typing a cursor-movement command scrolls back to where the cursor is. +- Scroll commands by screen line. g CTRL-E and g CTRL-Y ? Requires the + first line to be able to start halfway. - Running a shell command from the GUI still has limitations. Look into how the terminal emulator of the Vim shell project can help: http://vimshell.wana.at -- Add Lua interface? (Wolfgang Oertl) +- Add Lua interface? (Wolfgang Oertl) patch by Luis Carvalho, 2008 Sep 5 + Patch for Make_ming.mak from Paul Moore (2008 Sep 1) 8 Add a command to jump to a certain kind of tag. Allow the user to specify values for the optional fields. E.g., ":tag size type=m". Also allow specifying the file and command, so that the result of @@ -1739,8 +2265,6 @@ Tab pages: 9 GUI implementation for the tab pages line for other systems. 7 GUI: Control over the appearance of the text in the labels (bold, color, font, etc.) -9 Make it possible to drag a tab page label to another position with the - mouse. 8 Make GUI menu in tab pages line configurable. Like the popup menu. 8 balloons for the tab page labels that are shortened to show the full path. 8 :tabmove +N move tab page N pages forward @@ -1790,7 +2314,6 @@ Spell checking: implement CHECKCOMPOUNDTRIPLE Add CHECKCOMPOUNDCASE: when compounding make leading capital lower case. How is it supposed to work? -8 implement using CHECKCOMPOUNDPATTERN: match words with sl_comppat[]. - Add a command the repeats ]s and z=, showing the misspelled word in its context. Thus to spell-check a whole file. - suggestion for "KG" to "kg" when it's keepcase. @@ -1813,8 +2336,6 @@ Spell checking: - PSEUDOROOT == NEEDAFFIX - COMPOUNDROOT -> COMPOUNDED? For a word that already is a compound word Or use COMPOUNDED2, COMPOUNDED3, etc. -8 Alternate Dutch word list at www.nederlandsewoorden.nl (use script to - obtain). But new Myspell wordlist will come (Hagen) - CIRCUMFIX: when a word uses a prefix marked with the CIRCUMFIX flag, then the word must also have a suffix marked with the CIRCUMFIX flag. It's a bit primitive, since only one flag is used, which doesn't allow matching @@ -1874,8 +2395,6 @@ Folding: 8 Add "z/" and "z?" for searching in not folded text only. 9 Add search pattern item to only match in closed or open fold and/or fold with certain level. Allows doing ":g/pat/cmd" to work on closed folds. -8 Add different highlighting for a fold line depending on the fold level. - (Noel Henson) 7 Use "++--", "+++--" for different levels instead of "+---" "+----". 8 When a closed fold is displayed open because of 'foldminlines', the behavior of commands is still like the fold is closed. How to make the @@ -1984,14 +2503,10 @@ Multi-byte characters: Support CTRL-K _{mnemonic}_ 7 In "-- INSERT (lang) --" show the name of the keymap used instead of "lang". (Ilya Dogolazky) -- Make 'langmap' accept multi-byte characters. - Patch from Konstantin Korikov, 2006 Oct 15. - Make 'breakat' accept multi-byte characters. Problem: can't use a lookup table anymore (breakat_flags[]). Simplistic solution: when 'formatoptions' contains "m" also break a line at a multi-byte character >= 0x100. -- Do we need the reverse of 'keymap', like 'langmap' but with files and - multi-byte characters? E.g., when using a Russian keyboard. - Add the possibility to enter mappings which are used whenever normal text could be entered. E.g., for "f" command. But not in Normal mode. Sort of opposite of 'langmap'. Use ":tmap" command? @@ -2132,7 +2647,6 @@ Syntax highlighting: words. 8 Add more command line completion for :syntax. 8 Add more command line completion for :highlight. -8 Add more command line completion for :sign. 7 Should find a better way to parse the :syntax and :highlight commands. Use tables or lists that can be shared by parsing for execution and completion? @@ -2276,6 +2790,7 @@ Built-in script language: option or environment variable. 8 ":let &option" should list the value of the option. 8 ":let Func().foo = value" should work, also when "foo" doesn't exist. + Also: ":let Func()[foo] = value" should work. Same for a List. 7 Add synIDlist(), making the whole list of syntax items on the syntax stack available as a List. 8 Add autocommand-event for when a variable is changed: @@ -2328,8 +2843,6 @@ Performance: when starting up in a color terminal. 8 Avoid alloc() for scratch buffer use, esp. in syntax.c. It's very slow on Win16. -9 Setting GUI options in the console (e.g., 'guifont') should not cause a - redraw. 8 Profiling shows that in_id_list() is used very often for C code. Can this function be improved? 8 For an existing file, the page size of the swap file is always the @@ -2541,6 +3054,9 @@ Tags: 8 Use a mechanism similar to omni completion to figure out the kind of tab for CTRL-] and jump to the appropriate matching tag (if there are several). + Alternative: be able to define a function that takes the tag name and uses + taglist() to find the right location. With indication of using CTRL-] so + that the context can be taken into account. (Robert Webb) 7 Can CTRL-] (jump to tag) include a following "." and "->" to restrict the number of possible matches? Check tags file for an item that has members. (Flemming Madsen) @@ -2700,6 +3216,12 @@ GUI: Autocommands: - Put autocommand event names in a hashtable for faster lookup? +8 When the SwapExists event is triggered, provide information about the + swap file, e.g., whether the process is running, file was modified, etc. + Must be possible to check the situation that it's probably OK to delete + the swap file. (Marc Merlin) +8 When all the patterns for an event are "*" there is no need to expand + buffer names to a full path. This can be slow for NFS. 7 For autocommand events that trigger multiple times per buffer (e.g., CursorHold), go through the list once and cache the result for a specific buffer. Invalidate the cache when adding/deleting autocommands or @@ -2782,7 +3304,7 @@ Autocommands: WinClose - Just before closing a window - Write the file now and then ('autosave'): *'autosave'* *'as'* *'noautosave'* *'noas'* - 'autosave' 'aw' number (default 0) + 'autosave' 'as' number (default 0) Automatically write the current buffer to file N seconds after the last change has been made and when |'modified'| is still set. Default: 0 = do not autosave the buffer. @@ -2931,7 +3453,6 @@ Command line completion: - For 'wildmenu': Simplify "../bar" when possible. - When using <Up> in wildmenu mode for a submenu, should go back to the current menu, not the first one. E.g., ":emenu File.Save<Up>". -8 For ":find" and ":sfind" expand files found in 'path'. 8 When using backtick expansion, the external command may write a greeting message. Add an option or commands to remove lines that match a regexp? 7 When listing matches of files, display the common path separately from the @@ -2999,6 +3520,8 @@ Insert mode: cout << "a" << ") :" << "y"; +9 "} else" causes following lines to be indented too much. (Rouben + Rostamian, 2008 Aug 30) 8 Lisp indenting: "\\" confuses the indenter. (Dorai Sitaram, 2006 May 17) 8 Why are continuation lines outside of a {} block not indented? E.g.: long_type foo = @@ -3013,6 +3536,13 @@ Insert mode: "asdf" } ); +8 In C++ a function isn't recognized inside a namespace: + (Chow Loong Jin) + namespace { + int + func(int arg) { + } + } 6 Add 'cino' flag for this function argument layout: (Spencer Collyer) func( arg1 , arg2 @@ -3099,8 +3629,6 @@ Java: Virtual edit: 8 Make the horizontal scrollbar work to move the text further left. -7 Add a mode where the cursor is only allowed to go one character after the - end of the line? 7 Allow specifying it separately for Tabs and beyond end-of-line? @@ -3307,6 +3835,8 @@ Searching: The vis.vim script has a ":S" command that does something like this. Can use "g/" in Normal mode, uses the '< to '> area. Use "&/" for searching the text in the Visual area? +9 Add "v" offset: "/pat/v": search for pattern and start Visual mode on the + matching text. 8 Add a mechanism for recursiveness: "\@(([^()]*\@g[^()]*)\)". \@g stands for "go recursive here" and \@( \) marks the recursive part. Perl does it this way: @@ -3317,6 +3847,9 @@ Searching: 8 Show the progress every second. Could use the code that checks for CTRL-C to find out how much time has passed. Or use SIGALRM. Where to show the number? +8 When using an expression for ":s", set the match position in a v: + variable. So that you can do ":%s/^/\=v:lnum/" to put a line number + before each line. 7 Support for approximate-regexps to find similar words (agrep http://www.tgries.de/agrep/ tre: http://laurikari.net/tre/index.html). 8 Add an item for a big character range, so that one can search for a @@ -3328,7 +3861,7 @@ Searching: 7 Add an option to accept a match at the cursor position. Also for search(). (Brett) 7 Add a flag to "/pat/" to discard an error. Useful to continue a mapping - when a search fails. Could be "/pat/E" (e is already used for an offset). + when a search fails. Could be "/pat/E" (e is already used for end offset). 7 Add pattern item to use properties of Unicode characters. In Perl it's "\p{L}" for a letter. See Regular Expression Pocket Reference. 8 Would it be possible to allow ":23,45/pat/flags" to search for "pat" in @@ -3440,7 +3973,9 @@ Undo: storing the differences. 8 Search for pattern in undo tree, showing when it happened and the text state, so that you can jump to it. -- Persistent undo: store undo in a file. +- Persistent undo: store undo in a file. Patch by Jordan Lewis, 2009 Feb + 20. Repost 2009 Nov 16. + Older ideas: Use timestamps, so that a version a certain time ago can be found and info before some time/date can be flushed. 'undopersist' gives maximum time to keep undo: "3h", "1d", "2w", "1y", etc. For the file use dot and @@ -3831,16 +4366,15 @@ Various improvements: Govindachar) 7 Add a command that goes back to the position from before jumping to the first quickfix location. ":cbefore"? -6 In the quickfix window statusline add the command used to get the list of - errors, e.g. ":make foo", ":grep something *.c". +7 Allow a window not to have a statusline. Makes it possible to use a + window as a buffer-tab selection. +8 Allow non-active windows to have a different statusline. (Yakov Lerner) 6 Python interface: add vim.message() function. (Michal Vitecek, 2002 Nov 5) 7 Support using ":vert" with User commands. Add expandable items <vert>. Do the same for ":browse" and ":confirm"? For ":silent" and ":debug" apply to the whole user command. More general: need a way to access command modifiers in a user command. Assign them to a v: variable? -7 Allow a window not to have a statusline. Makes it possible to use a - window as a buffer-tab selection. 7 Add an invisible buffer which can be edited. For use in scripts that want to manipulate text without changing the window layout. 8 Add a command to revert to the saved version of file; undo or redo until @@ -3865,7 +4399,6 @@ Various improvements: etc. Combinations of Alt, Ctrl and Shift are also possible. Recognize these to avoid inserting the raw byte sequence, handle like the key without modifier (unless mapped). -7 Support ":browse edit" in console, using explorer.vim? 6 Add "gG": like what "gj" is to "j": go to the N'th window line. 8 Add command like ":normal" that accepts <Key> notation like ":map". 9 Support ACLs on more systems. @@ -3905,12 +4438,6 @@ Various improvements: 3 Make "2d%" work like "d%d%" instead of "d2%"? 7 "g CTRL-O" jumps back to last used buffer. Skip CTRL-O jumps in the same buffer. Make jumplist remember the last ten accessed buffers? -- Keep a list of most recently used files for each window, use "[o" to go - back (older file) and "]n" to go forward (newer file) (like ^O and ^I for - jumps). (Webb) Use ":files" and ":ls" to list the files in history order. -7 Add a history of recently accessed buffer. Maybe make "2 CTRL-^" jump to - the 2nd previously visited buffer, "3 CTRL-^" to the third, etc. Or use - "3 g CTRL-^" for this? - Add code to disable the CAPS key when going from Insert to Normal mode. - Set date/protection/etc. of the patchfile the same as the original file. - Use growarray for termcodes[] in term.c @@ -4096,7 +4623,7 @@ Various improvements: - Updatescript() can be done faster with a string instead of a char. - Screen updating is inefficient with CTRL-F and CTRL-B when there are long lines. -- Uppercase characters in ex commands can be made lowercase? +- Uppercase characters in Ex commands can be made lowercase? 8 Add option to show characters in text not as "|A" but as decimal ("^129"), hex ("\x81") or octal ("\201") or meta (M-x). Nvi has the 'octal' option to switch from hex to octal. Vile can show unprintable characters in hex @@ -4156,7 +4683,7 @@ Various improvements: for use in macro's and the like. - Keep output from listings in a window, so you can have a look at it while working in another window. Put cmdline in a separate window? -- Add possibility to put output of ex commands in a buffer or file, e.g. for +- Add possibility to put output of Ex commands in a buffer or file, e.g. for ":set all". ":r :set all"? - 'edit' option: When off changing the buffer is not possible (Really read-only mode). diff --git a/runtime/doc/uganda.txt b/runtime/doc/uganda.txt index 8f684e835..64d529710 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/uganda.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/uganda.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*uganda.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 21 +*uganda.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Dec 27 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -194,11 +194,12 @@ child, you should have the intention to do this for at least one year. How do you know that the money will be spent right? First of all you have my personal guarantee as the author of Vim. I trust the people that are working -at the centre, I know them personally. Further more, the centre is -co-sponsored and inspected by World Vision, Save the Children Fund and -International Child Care Fund. The centre is visited about once a year to -check the progress (at our own cost). I have visited the centre myself in -1996, 1998, 2000, 2001 and 2003. The visit reports are on the ICCF web site. +at the centre, I know them personally. Further more, the centre has been +co-sponsored and inspected by World Vision, Save the Children Fund and is now +under the supervision of Pacific Academy Outreach Society. The centre is +visited about once a year to check the progress (at our own cost). I have +visited the centre myself many times, starting in 1993. The visit reports are +on the ICCF web site. If you have any further questions, send me e-mail: <Bram@vim.org>. diff --git a/runtime/doc/undo.txt b/runtime/doc/undo.txt index c50e6390c..0659948fe 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/undo.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/undo.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*undo.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 30 +*undo.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Apr 12 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -106,6 +106,10 @@ change again. But you can do something like this: > After this an "u" command will undo the delete command and the previous change. +To do the opposite, break a change into two undo blocks, in Insert mode use +CTRL-G u. This is useful if you want an insert command to be undoable in +parts. E.g., for each sentence. |i_CTRL-G_u| + ============================================================================== 4. Undo branches *undo-branches* *undo-tree* diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_04.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_04.txt index d1af10d63..a3ab0d638 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_04.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_04.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*usr_04.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Jun 21 +*usr_04.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Sep 06 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ When using blockwise selection, you have four corners. "o" only takes you to one of the other corners, diagonally. Use "O" to move to the other corner in the same line. -Note that "o" and "O" in Visual mode work very different from Normal mode, +Note that "o" and "O" in Visual mode work very differently from Normal mode, where they open a new line below or above the cursor. ============================================================================== diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_05.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_05.txt index 0bac988d7..8164196da 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_05.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_05.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*usr_05.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2007 May 11 +*usr_05.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Jun 04 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar @@ -205,8 +205,8 @@ to 78, but only locally in one file. *restore-cursor* > autocmd BufReadPost * - \ if line("'\"") > 0 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | - \ exe "normal g`\"" | + \ if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | + \ exe "normal! g`\"" | \ endif Another autocommand. This time it is used after reading any file. The diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_06.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_06.txt index a33912981..429272f9d 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_06.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_06.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*usr_06.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 24 +*usr_06.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Oct 28 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar @@ -244,10 +244,14 @@ commands to move in Visual mode, of course. This also works on Unix, if you have a PostScript printer. Otherwise, you will have to do a bit more work. You need to convert the text to HTML first, -and then print it from a web browser such as Netscape. +and then print it from a web browser. Convert the current file to HTML with this command: > + :TOhtml + +In case that doesn't work: > + :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/2html.vim You will see it crunching away, this can take quite a while for a large file. diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_11.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_11.txt index 67328846a..1f4e7ca57 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_11.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_11.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*usr_11.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 24 +*usr_11.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Oct 29 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar @@ -6,9 +6,9 @@ Did your computer crash? And you just spent hours editing? Don't panic! Vim -keeps enough information on harddisk to be able to restore most of your work. -This chapter shows you how to get your work back and explains how the swap -file is used. +stores enough information to be able to restore most of your work. This +chapter shows you how to get your work back and explains how the swap file is +used. |11.1| Basic recovery |11.2| Where is the swap file? @@ -111,6 +111,8 @@ Example: > vim -r .help.txt.swo This is also handy when the swap file is in another directory than expected. +Vim recognizes files with the pattern *.s[uvw][a-z] as swap files. + If this still does not work, see what file names Vim reports and rename the files accordingly. Check the 'directory' option to see where Vim may have put the swap file. @@ -214,7 +216,7 @@ extent of the changes that were "forgotten". If you are the one in charge of that file, be prepared to redo your last changes. -WHAT TO DO? +WHAT TO DO? *swap-exists-choices* If dialogs are supported you will be asked to select one of five choices: diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_25.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_25.txt index 88505da30..088ad2ef8 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_25.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_25.txt @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ want to enable one, use the following command: > One horizontal scrollbar will appear at the bottom of the Vim window. If you don't have a scrollbar or don't want to use it, use these commands to -scroll the text. The cursor will stay in the same place, but it's move back +scroll the text. The cursor will stay in the same place, but it's moved back into the visible text if necessary. zh scroll right @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ The layout is messed up. To avoid that, use the "gr" command: What happens is that the "gr" command makes sure the new character takes the right amount of screen space. Extra spaces or tabs are inserted to fill the gap. Thus what actually happens is that a tab is replaced by "x" and then -blanks added to make the text after it keep it's place. In this case a +blanks added to make the text after it keep its place. In this case a tab is inserted. When you need to replace more than one character, you use the "R" command to go to Replace mode (see |04.9|). This messes up the layout and replaces diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_31.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_31.txt index ff3dfbcc2..22ba60f85 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_31.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_31.txt @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ you can set the 'lines' option to set a different window size: > :set lines=55 -You don't want to do this in a terminal, since it's size is fixed (except for +You don't want to do this in a terminal, since its size is fixed (except for an xterm that supports resizing). The gvimrc file is searched for in the same locations as the vimrc file. Normally its name is "~/.gvimrc" for Unix and "$VIM/_gvimrc" for MS-Windows. diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_43.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_43.txt index 089f3c4ba..8d7d03ac1 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_43.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_43.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*usr_43.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 24 +*usr_43.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Dec 28 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar @@ -57,7 +57,8 @@ default value or the value from the last ":set" command. Likewise, the mapping for "\c" will disappear when editing another buffer. The ":map <buffer>" command creates a mapping that is local to the current buffer. This works with any mapping command: ":map!", ":vmap", etc. The -|<LocalLeader>| in the mapping is replaced with the value of "maplocalleader". +|<LocalLeader>| in the mapping is replaced with the value of the +"maplocalleader" variable. You can find examples for filetype plugins in this directory: > diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_44.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_44.txt index f5506b4cb..448f2620d 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_44.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_44.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*usr_44.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 24 +*usr_44.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Dec 28 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar @@ -493,9 +493,9 @@ one for C by using the following command: > :runtime! syntax/c.vim The ":runtime!" command searches 'runtimepath' for all "syntax/c.vim" files. -This makes the C syntax be defined like for C files. If you have replaced the -c.vim syntax file, or added items with an extra file, these will be loaded as -well. +This makes the C parts of the C++ syntax be defined like for C files. If you +have replaced the c.vim syntax file, or added items with an extra file, these +will be loaded as well. After loading the C syntax items the specific C++ items can be defined. For example, add keywords that are not used in C: > @@ -503,8 +503,8 @@ For example, add keywords that are not used in C: > This works just like in any other syntax file. -Now consider the Perl language. It consists of two distinct parts: a -documentation section in POD format, and a program written in Perl itself. +Now consider the Perl language. A Perl script consists of two distinct parts: +a documentation section in POD format, and a program written in Perl itself. The POD section starts with "=head" and ends with "=cut". You want to define the POD syntax in one file, and use it from the Perl syntax file. The ":syntax include" command reads in a syntax file and stores @@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ as an example will save you a lot of time. Choose a good, descriptive name for your syntax file. Use lowercase letters and digits. Don't make it too long, it is used in many places: The name of -the syntax file "name.vim", 'filetype', b:current_syntax the start of each +the syntax file "name.vim", 'filetype', b:current_syntax and the start of each syntax group (nameType, nameStatement, nameString, etc). Start with a check for "b:current_syntax". If it is defined, some other diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_45.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_45.txt index 42a11b486..ac5d672eb 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_45.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_45.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*usr_45.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Apr 30 +*usr_45.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Nov 15 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ actually view a file that way, if you have lots of time at hand. Suppose you have setup Vim to use Unicode, and you want to edit a file that is in 16-bit Unicode. Sounds simple, right? Well, Vim actually uses utf-8 -encoding internally, thus the 16-bit encoding must be converted. Thus there +encoding internally, thus the 16-bit encoding must be converted, since there is a difference between the character set (Unicode) and the encoding (utf-8 or 16-bit). Vim will try to detect what kind of file you are editing. It uses the @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ if it's one of these encodings: When you start editing that 16-bit Unicode file, and it has a BOM, Vim will detect this and convert the file to utf-8 when reading it. The 'fileencoding' option (without s at the end) is set to the detected value. In this case it -is "ucs-2le". That means it's Unicode, two bytes and little-endian. This +is "utf-16le". That means it's Unicode, 16-bit and little-endian. This file format is common on MS-Windows (e.g., for registry files). When writing the file, Vim will compare 'fileencoding' with 'encoding'. If they are different, the text will be converted. diff --git a/runtime/doc/usr_90.txt b/runtime/doc/usr_90.txt index 6701fe942..4bef7aa09 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/usr_90.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/usr_90.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*usr_90.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Apr 24 +*usr_90.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Sep 10 VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar @@ -126,12 +126,12 @@ If it is alright you will finally see: test results: ~ ALL DONE ~ -If there are one or two messages about failed tests, Vim might still work, but -not perfectly. If you see a lot of error messages or Vim doesn't finish until -the end, there must be something wrong. Either try to find out yourself, or -find someone who can solve it. You could look in the |maillist-archive| for a -solution. If everything else fails, you could ask in the vim |maillist| if -someone can help you. +If you get "TEST FAILURE" some test failed. If there are one or two messages +about failed tests, Vim might still work, but not perfectly. If you see a lot +of error messages or Vim doesn't finish until the end, there must be something +wrong. Either try to find out yourself, or find someone who can solve it. +You could look in the |maillist-archive| for a solution. If everything else +fails, you could ask in the vim |maillist| if someone can help you. INSTALLING diff --git a/runtime/doc/various.txt b/runtime/doc/various.txt index 1755e4ca0..d26052244 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/various.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/various.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*various.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 06 +*various.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Nov 11 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -179,8 +179,8 @@ g8 Print the hex values of the bytes used in the (to start Insert mode, see |:startinsert|). A ":" command must be completed as well. And you can't use "Q" or "gQ" to start Ex mode. - {commands} cannot start with a space. Put a 1 (one) - before it, 1 space is one space. + {commands} cannot start with a space. Put a count of + 1 (one) before it, "1 " is one space. The 'insertmode' option is ignored for {commands}. This command cannot be followed by another command, since any '|' is considered part of the command. @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ B *+mouse_netterm* Unix only: netterm mouse handling |netterm-mouse| N *+mouse_pterm* QNX only: pterm mouse handling |qnx-terminal| N *+mouse_sysmouse* Unix only: *BSD console mouse handling |sysmouse| N *+mouse_xterm* Unix only: xterm mouse handling |xterm-mouse| -B *+multi_byte* Korean and other languages |multibyte| +B *+multi_byte* 16 and 32 bit characters |multibyte| *+multi_byte_ime* Win32 input method for multibyte chars |multibyte-ime| N *+multi_lang* non-English language support |multi-lang| m *+mzscheme* Mzscheme interface |mzscheme| @@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ g CTRL-A Only when Vim was compiled with MEM_PROFILING defined Note that the longer the {subject} you give, the less matches will be found. You can get an idea how this all works by using commandline completion (type CTRL-D - after ":help subject"). + after ":help subject" |c_CTRL-D|). If there are several matches, you can have them listed by hitting CTRL-D. Example: > :help cont<Ctrl-D> diff --git a/runtime/doc/version5.txt b/runtime/doc/version5.txt index 16d2657b9..028b574b8 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/version5.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/version5.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*version5.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Jun 28 +*version5.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Dec 17 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -460,10 +460,10 @@ See |--|. Regular expression patterns *added-regexp* --------------------------- -Added specifying a range for the number of matches of a atom: "\{a,b}". |/\{| +Added specifying a range for the number of matches of an atom: "\{a,b}". |/\{| Added the "shortest match" regexp "\{-}" (Webb). -Added "\s", matches a white character. Can replace "[ \t]". |/\s| -Added "\S", matches a non-white character. Can replace "[^ \t]". |/\S| +Added "\s", matches a white character. Can replace "[ \t]". |/\s| +Added "\S", matches a non-white character. Can replace "[^ \t]". |/\S| Overloaded tags *tag-overloaded* diff --git a/runtime/doc/version7.txt b/runtime/doc/version7.txt index fecac5395..61fc8528e 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/version7.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/version7.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*version7.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 09 +*version7.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Dec 02 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ The 'spelllang' option is used to specify the accepted language(s) The 'spellfile' option specifies where new words are added The 'spellsuggest' option specifies the methods used for making suggestions -The |[s| and |]s| commands can be used to move to the next or previous error +The |]s| and |[s| commands can be used to move to the next or previous error The |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to add good and wrong words The |z=| command can be used to list suggestions and correct the word The |:mkspell| command is used to generate a Vim spell file from word lists @@ -1868,7 +1868,7 @@ message for the next buffer. Temporarily clear 'shortmess' to avoid that. Win32: Cannot edit a file starting with # with --remote. Do escape % and # when building the ":drop" command. -A comment or | just after a expression-backtick argument was not recognized. +A comment or | just after an expression-backtick argument was not recognized. E.g. in :e `="foo"`"comment. "(" does not stop at an empty sentence (single dot and white space) while ")" @@ -4741,7 +4741,7 @@ Added floating point support. |Float| Added argument to mode() to return a bit more detail about the current mode. (Ben Schmidt) -Added support for BSD console mouse: |sysmouse|. (Paul Mahol) +Added support for BSD console mouse: |sysmouse|. (Paul B. Mahol) Added the "newtab" value for the 'switchbuf' option. (partly by Yegappan Lakshmanan) @@ -5903,7 +5903,7 @@ Files: src/ex_getln.c Patch 7.1.188 Problem: When 'showmode' is off the message for changing a readonly file is - given in the second column instead of the first. (Payl B. Mahol) + given in the second column instead of the first. (Payl B. Mahol) Solution: Put the W10 message in the first column. Files: src/edit.c diff --git a/runtime/doc/vim-fr.1 b/runtime/doc/vim-fr.1 index 3b49351bf..5a5a871b3 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vim-fr.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vim-fr.1 @@ -2,6 +2,8 @@ .\" (richard.hitier@dial.oleane.com) .\" Mise jour de la traduction par David Blanchet .\" (david.blanchet@free.fr) 2006-06-10 +.\" Mise jour de la traduction par Dominique Pell +.\" (dominique.pelle@gmail.com) 2008-11-29 .\" .TH VIM 1 "22 Fvrier 2002" .SH NOM @@ -194,7 +196,7 @@ se comportera alors quasiment comme Vi, mme s'il existe un fichier .vimrc. .TP \-d Dmarre en mode Diff. -Deux ou trois noms de fichiers doivent tre spcifis. +Deux, trois ou quatre noms de fichiers doivent tre spcifis. .B Vim ouvrira alors tous les fichiers et affichera leurs diffrences. Fonctionne comme vimdiff(1). diff --git a/runtime/doc/vim-fr.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/vim-fr.UTF-8.1 index 6e7b183be..9a8bea66c 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vim-fr.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vim-fr.UTF-8.1 @@ -2,6 +2,8 @@ .\" (richard.hitier@dial.oleane.com) .\" Mise à jour de la traduction par David Blanchet .\" (david.blanchet@free.fr) 2006-06-10 +.\" Mise à jour de la traduction par Dominique Pellé +.\" (dominique.pelle@gmail.com) 2008-11-29 .\" .TH VIM 1 "22 Février 2002" .SH NOM @@ -194,7 +196,7 @@ se comportera alors quasiment comme Vi, même s'il existe un fichier .vimrc. .TP \-d Démarre en mode Diff. -Deux ou trois noms de fichiers doivent être spécifiés. +Deux, trois ou quatre noms de fichiers doivent être spécifiés. .B Vim ouvrira alors tous les fichiers et affichera leurs différences. Fonctionne comme vimdiff(1). diff --git a/runtime/doc/vim-pl.1 b/runtime/doc/vim-pl.1 index 3fa34e299..d506b33c9 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vim-pl.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vim-pl.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH VIM 1 "2002 Lut 22" +.TH VIM 1 "2006 kwi 11" .SH NAME vim \- Vi rozbudowany, edytor tekstu dla programisty .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ vim \- Vi rozbudowany, edytor tekstu dla programisty [opcje] \-t znacznik .br .B vim -[opcje] \-q [plik bdu] +[opcje] \-q [plik_bdu] .PP .br .B ex @@ -35,10 +35,10 @@ jest edytorem tekstu kompatybilnym z Vi. Moe by uywany do edycji wszelkiego rodzaju plikw tekstowych. Uyteczny zwaszcza przy edycji programw. .PP -Posiada wiele usprawnie w porwnaniu z Vi: wielo poziomowe cofanie zmian, +Posiada wiele usprawnie w porwnaniu z Vi: wielopoziomowe cofanie zmian, wiele okien i buforw, podwietlanie skadni, edycja linii polece, uzupenianie nazw plikw, pomoc on-line, wizualna selekcja, itd. -Zobacz ":help vi_diff.txt" dla podsumowania rni pomidzy +Zobacz ":help vi_diff.txt" dla podsumowania rnic pomidzy .B Vimem i Vi. .PP @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ rodzaju etykiety goto. {znacznika} szuka si w pliku tags, zwizany z nim plik staje si plikiem biecym i wykonuje si powizane polecenie. Zazwyczaj uywa si tego sposobu dla programw w C, w ktrych wypadku -{znacznik} powinien by nazw funkcji. +{znacznik} moe by nazw funkcji. W efekcie plik zawierajcy okrelon funkcj staje si plikiem biecym a kursor jest umieszczony na pocztku funkcji. Zobacz ":help tag-commands". @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Zobacz ":help tag-commands". Zacznij w trybie quickFix. Plik [plik_bdw] zostaje zinterpretowany i pokae si pierwszy bd. Jeli brak opcji [plik_bdw] nazwa pliku zostanie pobrana z opcji -'errorfile' (domylnie "AztecC.Err" dla Amigi, "errros.err" dla innych +\&'errorfile' (domylnie "AztecC.Err" dla Amigi, "errros.err" dla innych systemw. Do kolejnych bdw mona przeskoczy dziki poleceniu ":cn". Zobacz ":help quickfix". @@ -140,8 +140,8 @@ Jeli brak "num" kursor zostanie umieszczony w ostatnim wierszu. +/{wzr} W pierwszym pliku kursor zostanie umieszczony na pierwszym wystpieniu {wzr}. -Zobacz ":help search-pattern" by dowiedzie si jakie s moliwoci -wzorw wyszukiwania. +Zobacz ":help search-pattern" by dowiedzie si jakie s moliwe +wzorce wyszukiwania. .TP +{polecenie} .TP @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ wtedy jeli \-S jest ostatnim argumentem). \-\-cmd {polecenie} Podobne do "\-c", ale polecenie jest wykonywane tu przed interpretacj jakiegokolwiek pliku vimrc. -Mona uy do 10 takich polece, niezaleni od polece od "\-c" +Mona uy do 10 takich polece, niezalenie od polece od "\-c" .TP \-A Jeli @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ bdzie zachowywa si jak Vi, nawet jeli istnieje plik .vimrc. .TP \-d Uruchom w trybie diff. -Powinno by dwa lub trzy nazwy plikw jako argumenty. +Powinno si uy dwch, trzech lub czterech nazwy plikw jako argumentw. .B Vim otworzy wszystkie te pliki i pokae rnice midzy nimi. Dziaa jak vimdiff(1). @@ -283,18 +283,18 @@ Ustawia opcje 'lisp' i 'showmatch'. \-m Zmiana pliku jest niemoliwa. Przestawia opcj 'write'. -Mona cay czas zmieni zawarto bufora, ale zapisanie pliku nie jest -moliwa. +Mona zmienia zawarto bufora, ale zapisanie pliku nie jest +moliwe. .TP \-M Opcje 'modifiable' i 'write' zostan wyczone, tak wic zmiany -w pliku oraz ich zapisanie nie s moliwe. Mona warto tych opcji +w pliku oraz ich zapisanie nie s moliwe. Warto tych opcji mona zmieni. .TP \-N -Tryb niekompatibylny. Przestawia opcj 'compatible'. Dziki temu +Tryb niekompatybilny. Przestawia opcj 'compatible'. Dziki temu .B Vim -bdzie zachowywa si odrobin lepiej, ale mniej zgodznie z Vi nawet +bdzie zachowywa si odrobin lepiej, ale mniej zgodnie z Vi nawet jeli nie istnieje plik .vimrc. .TP \-n @@ -323,8 +323,8 @@ Kiedy brak N, otwrz jedn kart dla kadego pliku. \-R Tryb tylko do odczytu. Zostanie ustawiona opcja 'readonly'. -Cay czas mona zmienia bufor, ale bdzie istniaa blokada przed przypadkowym -zapisaniem pliku. +Cay czas mona zmienia bufor, ale bdzie istniaa blokada by chroni +przed przypadkowym zapisaniem pliku. Jeli chcesz zapisa plik dodaj wykrzyknik do polecenia Ex, np. ":w!". Opcja \-R implikuje opcj \-n (zobacz poniej). Opcja 'readonly' moe zosta przestawiona poprzez ":set noro". @@ -427,15 +427,15 @@ Wywietl informacj o pomocy i zakoczy, to samo co"\-h". .TP \-\-literal Potraktuj nazwy plikw dosownie i nie rozwizuj kwantyfikatorw. Nie -ma znaczenia na Uniksach gdzie powoka rozwizuje kwantyfikatorw +ma znaczenia na Uniksach gdzie powoka rozwizuje kwantyfikatory. .TP \-\-noplugin Pomi adowanie wtyczek. Implikowane przy \-u NONE. .TP \-\-remote -Pocz si z serwerem Vima i edytuj w nim reszt argumentw. Jeli nie -znaleziono serwera zostanie zgoszony bd a pliki bd otwarte -w biecym Vimie. +Pocz si z serwerem Vima i edytuj w nim reszt plikw podanych jako +argumenty. Jeli nie znaleziono serwera zostanie zgoszony bd a pliki zostan +otwarte w biecym Vimie. .TP \-\-remote\-expr {wyraenie} Pocz z serwerem Vima, rozwi w nim {wyraenie} i wypisz rozwizanie @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Tak samo jak \-remote, ale bez ostrzeenia kiedy nie znaleziono serwera. .TP \-\-remote\-wait -Tak samo jak \-remote, ale Vim nie zakoczy dopki pliki nie zostan +Tak samo jak \-remote, ale Vim nie zakoczy dopki pliki pozostan otwarte. .TP \-\-remote\-wait\-silent @@ -487,6 +487,9 @@ Dokumentacja .B Vima Uyj ":help doc\-file\-list" aby uzyska pen list. .TP +/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags +Plik znacznikw suy do znajdowania informacji w plikach dokumentacji. +.TP /usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim Globalne uruchamianie podwietlania skadni. .TP diff --git a/runtime/doc/vim-pl.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/vim-pl.UTF-8.1 index 365da5a41..f3551d2f6 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vim-pl.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vim-pl.UTF-8.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.TH VIM 1 "2002 Lut 22" +.TH VIM 1 "2006 kwi 11" .SH NAME vim \- Vi rozbudowany, edytor tekstu dla programisty .SH SYNOPSIS @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ vim \- Vi rozbudowany, edytor tekstu dla programisty [opcje] \-t znacznik .br .B vim -[opcje] \-q [plik błędu] +[opcje] \-q [plik_błędu] .PP .br .B ex @@ -35,10 +35,10 @@ jest edytorem tekstu kompatybilnym z Vi. Może być używany do edycji wszelkiego rodzaju plików tekstowych. Użyteczny zwłaszcza przy edycji programów. .PP -Posiada wiele usprawnień w porównaniu z Vi: wielo poziomowe cofanie zmian, +Posiada wiele usprawnień w porównaniu z Vi: wielopoziomowe cofanie zmian, wiele okien i buforów, podświetlanie składni, edycja linii poleceń, uzupełnianie nazw plików, pomoc on-line, wizualna selekcja, itd. -Zobacz ":help vi_diff.txt" dla podsumowania różnić pomiędzy +Zobacz ":help vi_diff.txt" dla podsumowania różnic pomiędzy .B Vimem i Vi. .PP @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ rodzaju etykiety goto. {znacznika} szuka się w pliku tags, związany z nim plik staje się plikiem bieżącym i wykonuje się powiązane polecenie. Zazwyczaj używa się tego sposobu dla programów w C, w których wypadku -{znacznik} powinien być nazwą funkcji. +{znacznik} może być nazwą funkcji. W efekcie plik zawierający określoną funkcję staje się plikiem bieżącym a kursor jest umieszczony na początku funkcji. Zobacz ":help tag-commands". @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Zobacz ":help tag-commands". Zacznij w trybie quickFix. Plik [plik_błędów] zostaje zinterpretowany i pokaże się pierwszy błąd. Jeśli brak opcji [plik_błędów] nazwa pliku zostanie pobrana z opcji -'errorfile' (domyślnie "AztecC.Err" dla Amigi, "errros.err" dla innych +\&'errorfile' (domyślnie "AztecC.Err" dla Amigi, "errros.err" dla innych systemów. Do kolejnych błędów można przeskoczyć dzięki poleceniu ":cn". Zobacz ":help quickfix". @@ -140,8 +140,8 @@ Jeśli brak "num" kursor zostanie umieszczony w ostatnim wierszu. +/{wzór} W pierwszym pliku kursor zostanie umieszczony na pierwszym wystąpieniu {wzór}. -Zobacz ":help search-pattern" by dowiedzieć się jakie są możliwości -wzorów wyszukiwania. +Zobacz ":help search-pattern" by dowiedzieć się jakie są możliwe +wzorce wyszukiwania. .TP +{polecenie} .TP @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ wtedy jeśli \-S jest ostatnim argumentem). \-\-cmd {polecenie} Podobne do "\-c", ale polecenie jest wykonywane tuż przed interpretacją jakiegokolwiek pliku vimrc. -Można użyć do 10 takich poleceń, niezależni od poleceń od "\-c" +Można użyć do 10 takich poleceń, niezależnie od poleceń od "\-c" .TP \-A Jeśli @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ będzie zachowywał się jak Vi, nawet jeśli istnieje plik .vimrc. .TP \-d Uruchom w trybie diff. -Powinno być dwa lub trzy nazwy plików jako argumenty. +Powinno się użyć dwóch, trzech lub czterech nazwy plików jako argumentów. .B Vim otworzy wszystkie te pliki i pokaże różnice między nimi. Działa jak vimdiff(1). @@ -283,18 +283,18 @@ Ustawia opcje 'lisp' i 'showmatch'. \-m Zmiana pliku jest niemożliwa. Przestawia opcję 'write'. -Można cały czas zmienić zawartość bufora, ale zapisanie pliku nie jest -możliwa. +Można zmieniać zawartość bufora, ale zapisanie pliku nie jest +możliwe. .TP \-M Opcje 'modifiable' i 'write' zostaną wyłączone, tak więc zmiany -w pliku oraz ich zapisanie nie są możliwe. Można wartość tych opcji +w pliku oraz ich zapisanie nie są możliwe. Wartość tych opcji można zmienić. .TP \-N -Tryb niekompatibylny. Przestawia opcję 'compatible'. Dzięki temu +Tryb niekompatybilny. Przestawia opcję 'compatible'. Dzięki temu .B Vim -będzie zachowywał się odrobinę lepiej, ale mniej zgodznie z Vi nawet +będzie zachowywał się odrobinę lepiej, ale mniej zgodnie z Vi nawet jeśli nie istnieje plik .vimrc. .TP \-n @@ -323,8 +323,8 @@ Kiedy brak N, otwórz jedną kartę dla każdego pliku. \-R Tryb tylko do odczytu. Zostanie ustawiona opcja 'readonly'. -Cały czas można zmieniać bufor, ale będzie istniała blokada przed przypadkowym -zapisaniem pliku. +Cały czas można zmieniać bufor, ale będzie istniała blokada by chronić +przed przypadkowym zapisaniem pliku. Jeśli chcesz zapisać plik dodaj wykrzyknik do polecenia Ex, np. ":w!". Opcja \-R implikuje opcję \-n (zobacz poniżej). Opcja 'readonly' może zostać przestawiona poprzez ":set noro". @@ -427,15 +427,15 @@ Wyświetl informację o pomocy i zakończy, to samo co"\-h". .TP \-\-literal Potraktuj nazwy plików dosłownie i nie rozwiązuj kwantyfikatorów. Nie -ma znaczenia na Uniksach gdzie powłoka rozwiązuje kwantyfikatorów +ma znaczenia na Uniksach gdzie powłoka rozwiązuje kwantyfikatory. .TP \-\-noplugin Pomiń ładowanie wtyczek. Implikowane przy \-u NONE. .TP \-\-remote -Połącz się z serwerem Vima i edytuj w nim resztę argumentów. Jeśli nie -znaleziono serwera zostanie zgłoszony błąd a pliki będą otwarte -w bieżącym Vimie. +Połącz się z serwerem Vima i edytuj w nim resztę plików podanych jako +argumenty. Jeśli nie znaleziono serwera zostanie zgłoszony błąd a pliki zostaną +otwarte w bieżącym Vimie. .TP \-\-remote\-expr {wyrażenie} Połącz z serwerem Vima, rozwiąż w nim {wyrażenie} i wypisz rozwiązanie @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Tak samo jak \-remote, ale bez ostrzeżenia kiedy nie znaleziono serwera. .TP \-\-remote\-wait -Tak samo jak \-remote, ale Vim nie zakończy dopóki pliki nie zostaną +Tak samo jak \-remote, ale Vim nie zakończy dopóki pliki pozostaną otwarte. .TP \-\-remote\-wait\-silent @@ -487,6 +487,9 @@ Dokumentacja .B Vima Użyj ":help doc\-file\-list" aby uzyskać pełną listę. .TP +/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags +Plik znaczników służy do znajdowania informacji w plikach dokumentacji. +.TP /usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim Globalne uruchamianie podświetlania składni. .TP diff --git a/runtime/doc/vim-ru.1 b/runtime/doc/vim-ru.1 index bb2597fea..dfcb3ece9 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vim-ru.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vim-ru.1 @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ vim \- Vi IMproved ( Vi), [] [ ..] .br .B vim -[] - +[] \- .br .B vim [] \-t @@ -69,12 +69,12 @@ vim \- Vi IMproved ( Vi), ":next". , "" (-), "--". .TP -- +\- . (stderr), . .TP --t {} +\-t {} "", goto. {} , , . @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ vim \- Vi IMproved ( Vi), , , , . . ":help tag-commands". .TP --q [ ] +\-q [ ] . [ ] . [ ] , ң 'errorfile' @@ -101,21 +101,21 @@ vim ex Ex. ":vi". Ex - "-e". + "\-e". .TP view " ". -. "-R". +. "\-R". .TP gvim gview . . - "-g". + "\-g". .TP rvim rview rgvim rgview , . .B Vim. - "r" "-Z". + "r" "\-Z". .SH , ͣ . @@ -132,21 +132,21 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .TP +{} .TP --c {} +\-c {} {} Ex. {} , ( ). : vim "+set si" main.c .br -: "+" "-c". +: "+" "\-c". .TP ---cmd {} - "-c", +\-\-cmd {} + "\-c", (vimrc). , - "-c". + "\-c". .TP --A +\-A .B Vim , @@ -158,34 +158,34 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .B Vim . .TP --b +\-b . , . .TP --C +\-C . 'compatible'. .B Vim Vi, .vimrc. .TP --d +\-d . . .B Vim ( vimdiff(1)). .TP --d {} +\-d {} {} ( Amiga). : "\-d con:20/30/600/150". .TP --e +\-e .B Vim Ex, "ex". .TP --f +\-f . .B Vim @@ -198,25 +198,25 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview (, ). Amiga ":sh" ":!" . .TP ---nofork +\-\-nofork . .B Vim ţ . .TP --F +\-F .B Vim FKMAP , .B Vim , , ޣ -'fkmap' 'rightleft'. +\&'fkmap' 'rightleft'. .B Vim . .TP --g +\-g .B Vim , @@ -224,13 +224,13 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .B Vim . .TP --h +\-h . .B Vim . .TP --H +\-H .B Vim @@ -241,69 +241,69 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .B Vim . .TP --i {viminfo} +\-i {viminfo} viminfo, ( "~/.viminfo" ). viminfo ԣ "NONE". .TP --L - , -r. +\-L + , \-r. .TP --l +\-l Lisp. 'lisp' 'showmatch'. .TP --m +\-m . 'write', . .TP --N +\-N . 'compatible'. .B Vim , Vi, (.vimrc). .TP --n +\-n -. . (, ). ":set uc=0". -- ":set uc=200". .TP --o[N] +\-o[N] N , ̣ . N , . .TP --O[N] +\-O[N] N , ̣ . N , . .TP --R +\-R " ". 'readonly'. , . Ex (, ":w!"). - "-R" , "-n" (. ). + "\-R" , "\-n" (. ). 'readonly' ":set noro". . ":help 'readonly'". .TP --r +\-r - . .TP --r {} +\-r {} . -. - , , ".swp". . ":help recovery". .TP --s - . "Ex" "-s" "-e". +\-s + . "Ex" "\-s" "\-e". .TP --s {scriptin} +\-s {scriptin} {scriptin}. , , . ":source! {scriptin}". , . .TP --T {terminal} +\-T {terminal} .B Vim . , @@ -312,96 +312,96 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .B Vim ( ) termcap terminfo. .TP --u {vimrc} +\-u {vimrc} {vimrc} . . . , "NONE". . ":help initialization". .TP --U {gvimrc} +\-U {gvimrc} {gvimrc} . . , "NONE". . ":help gui-init". .TP --V +\-V "" . , , - viminfo. .TP --v +\-v .B Vim Vi, "vi". "ex". .TP --w {scriptout} +\-w {scriptout} , ģ , {scriptout}. , - "vim -s" ":source!". {scriptout} , + "vim \-s" ":source!". {scriptout} , . .TP --W {scriptout} - "-w", . +\-W {scriptout} + "\-w", . .TP --x +\-x . . .TP --X +\-X X-. , . .TP --Z +\-Z . , , "r". .TP --- +\-\- . . , . .TP ---help - . , "-h". +\-\-help + . , "\-h". .TP ---version +\-\-version . .TP ---remote +\-\-remote Vim , . , , Vim. .TP ---remote-expr {} +\-\-remote\-expr {} Vim Σ {}. (stdout). .TP ---remote-send {} +\-\-remote\-send {} Vim {}. .TP ---remote-silent - "--remote", , . +\-\-remote\-silent + "\-\-remote", , . .TP ---remote-wait - "--remote", Vim , +\-\-remote\-wait + "\-\-remote", Vim , . .TP ---remote-wait-silent - "--remote-wait", , . +\-\-remote\-wait\-silent + "\-\-remote\-wait", , . .TP ---serverlist +\-\-serverlist Vim. .TP ---servername {} +\-\-servername {} {} . -"--remote" , {} Vim, +"\-\-remote" , {} Vim, , . .TP ---socketid {id} +\-\-socketid {id} GTK: GtkPlug gvim . .TP ---echo-wid +\-\-echo\-wid GTK: (Window ID) (stdout). .SH diff --git a/runtime/doc/vim-ru.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/vim-ru.UTF-8.1 index 78127a1cc..ef527213e 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vim-ru.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vim-ru.UTF-8.1 @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ vim \- Vi IMproved (Улучшенный Vi), текстовый редакто [ключи] [файл ..] .br .B vim -[ключи] - +[ключи] \- .br .B vim [ключи] \-t метка @@ -69,12 +69,12 @@ vim \- Vi IMproved (Улучшенный Vi), текстовый редакто помощи команды ":next". Чтобы править файл, имя которого начинается с символа "дефис" (-), перед списком файлов необходимо поставить "--". .TP -- +\- Файл будет прочитан из потока стандартного ввода. Команды будут считываться из стандартного потока диагностики (stderr), который должен быть терминалом. .TP --t {метка} +\-t {метка} Имя файла и начальная позиция курсора зависят от "метки", похожей на метку goto. {метка} ищется в файле меток, соответствующий файл становится активным, а соответствующая команда исполняется. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ vim \- Vi IMproved (Улучшенный Vi), текстовый редакто Файл, содержащий функцию, становится активным, а курсор помещается в начало функции. См. ":help tag-commands". .TP --q [файл ошибок] +\-q [файл ошибок] Начать работу в режиме быстрого исправления. При этом считывается [файл ошибок] и первая ошибка выводится на экран. Если [файл ошибок] не указан, имя файла берётся из значения опции 'errorfile' @@ -101,21 +101,21 @@ vim ex Запуск в режиме Ex. Для перехода в нормальный режим необходимо выполнить команду ":vi". Режим Ex включает -также ключ "-e". +также ключ "\-e". .TP view Запуск в режиме "только для чтения". Вы будете защищены от случайной записи -файла. То же самое можно сделать ключом "-R". +файла. То же самое можно сделать ключом "\-R". .TP gvim gview Версия с графическим интерфейсом. Запускается в новом окне. -То же самое можно сделать при запуске с ключом "-g". +То же самое можно сделать при запуске с ключом "\-g". .TP rvim rview rgvim rgview Как и предыдущие команды, но с ограничениями. Нельзя запускать команды оболочки или приостанавливать работу .B Vim. -Вместо приставки "r" можно использовать ключ "-Z". +Вместо приставки "r" можно использовать ключ "\-Z". .SH КЛЮЧИ Ключи могут быть указаны в любом порядке, до или после имён файлов. Ключи без аргументов могут быть объединены под одним @@ -132,21 +132,21 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .TP +{команда} .TP --c {команда} +\-c {команда} {команда} исполняется после загрузки первого файла как команда Ex. Если {команда} содержит пробелы, то она должна быть заключена в двойные кавычки (в зависимости от используемой оболочки). Пример: vim "+set si" main.c .br -Примечание: Можно указывать до десяти команд "+" или "-c". +Примечание: Можно указывать до десяти команд "+" или "\-c". .TP ---cmd {команда} -Как "-c", но команда исполняется перед обработкой любого файла +\-\-cmd {команда} +Как "\-c", но команда исполняется перед обработкой любого файла настроек (vimrc). Можно указывать до десяти таких команд, независимо от количества -команд "-c". +команд "\-c". .TP --A +\-A Если .B Vim был собран с поддержкой арабского языка для правки файлов, @@ -158,34 +158,34 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .B Vim завершает работу с ошибкой. .TP --b +\-b Двоичный режим. Производится настройка некоторых опций, делающих возможной правку двоичного или исполняемого файла. .TP --C +\-C Режим совместимости. Включает опцию 'compatible'. .B Vim будет работать почти как Vi, даже если существует файл .vimrc. .TP --d +\-d Режим поиска различий. Должно быть указано два или три имени файла. .B Vim откроет все файлы и покажет различия между ними (как vimdiff(1)). .TP --d {устройство} +\-d {устройство} Открыть {устройство} для использования в качестве терминала (только на Amiga). Пример: "\-d con:20/30/600/150". .TP --e +\-e Запустить .B Vim в режиме Ex, как будто исполняемый файл имеет имя "ex". .TP --f +\-f Режим активного приложения. Версия .B Vim с графическим интерфейсом не будет ветвиться и отключаться @@ -198,25 +198,25 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview сеанса правки (например, программа для работы с электронной почтой). На платформе Amiga команды ":sh" и ":!" не будут работать. .TP ---nofork +\-\-nofork Режим активного приложения. Версия .B Vim с графическим интерфейсом не будет ветвиться и отключаться от запустившей её оболочки. .TP --F +\-F Если .B Vim был собран с поддержкой FKMAP для правки текста справа налево и настроек клавиатуры для языка фарси, этот ключ запускает .B Vim в режиме фарси, иначе говоря, с включёнными опциями -'fkmap' и 'rightleft'. +\&'fkmap' и 'rightleft'. В противном случае .B Vim завершает работу с сообщением об ошибке. .TP --g +\-g Если .B Vim был собран с поддержкой графического интерфейса, этот ключ @@ -224,13 +224,13 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .B Vim завершает работу с сообщением об ошибке. .TP --h +\-h Выводит краткую информацию об аргументах и ключах командной строки. После этого .B Vim завершает работу. .TP --H +\-H Если .B Vim был собран с поддержкой правки текста справа налево @@ -241,69 +241,69 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .B Vim завершает работу с сообщением об ошибке. .TP --i {viminfo} +\-i {viminfo} Если используется файл viminfo, то этот ключ задаёт имя такого файла (вместо "~/.viminfo" по умолчанию). Можно также избежать использования файла viminfo путём указания имени "NONE". .TP --L -То же, что и -r. +\-L +То же, что и \-r. .TP --l +\-l Режим Lisp. Включаются опции 'lisp' и 'showmatch'. .TP --m +\-m Изменение файлов запрещено. При этом отключается опция 'write', поэтому запись файлов становится невозможной. .TP --N +\-N Режим неполной совместимости. Отключается 'compatible'. .B Vim будет работать лучше, но не будет полностью совместим с Vi, даже если отсутствует файл сценария настроек (.vimrc). .TP --n +\-n Не использовать своп-файл. Восстановление при сбое в работе будет невозможно. Удобно для правки файла на очень медленном носителе (например, гибком диске). То же самое можно сделать командой ":set uc=0". Отмена -- ":set uc=200". .TP --o[N] +\-o[N] Открыть N окон, разделённых по горизонтали. Если N не указано, то открывается по одному окну на каждый файл. .TP --O[N] +\-O[N] Открыть N окон, разделённых по вертикали. Если N не указано, то открывается по одному окну на каждый файл. .TP --R +\-R Режим "только для чтения". Включается опция 'readonly'. Файл в буфере доступен для редактирования, но его копию на диске нельзя случайно перезаписать. Для сохранения файла необходимо добавить восклицательный знак к соответствующей команде Ex (например, ":w!"). -Ключ "-R" подразумевает также, что используется и ключ "-n" (см. выше). +Ключ "\-R" подразумевает также, что используется и ключ "\-n" (см. выше). Опция 'readonly' может быть выключена по команде ":set noro". См. ":help 'readonly'". .TP --r +\-r Вывести список своп-файлов и информацию об их использовании для восстановления после сбоя. .TP --r {файл} +\-r {файл} Режим восстановления. Для восстановления после сбоя будет использован своп-файл. Своп-файл имеет то же имя, что и текстовый файл, но с добавлением расширения ".swp". См. ":help recovery". .TP --s -Тихий режим. Только при запуске как "Ex" или если перед "-s" указан ключ "-e". +\-s +Тихий режим. Только при запуске как "Ex" или если перед "\-s" указан ключ "\-e". .TP --s {scriptin} +\-s {scriptin} Считывается файл сценария {scriptin}. При этом, содержимое файла воспринимается в виде команд, как если бы они были набраны на консоли. То же самое достигается командой ":source! {scriptin}". Если конец файла считывается до завершения работы редактора, то в дальнейшем ввод осуществляется с клавиатуры. .TP --T {terminal} +\-T {terminal} Сообщает .B Vim тип используемого терминала. Необходимо только в тех ситуациях, когда @@ -312,96 +312,96 @@ rvim rview rgvim rgview .B Vim (встроено в него) или определено в файлах termcap или terminfo. .TP --u {vimrc} +\-u {vimrc} Использовать команды из файла сценария {vimrc} для настройки. Все остальные файлы настроек пропускаются. Удобно для редактирования специальных типов файлов. Чтобы избежать использования сценариев настроек вообще, можно использовать имя "NONE". См. ":help initialization". .TP --U {gvimrc} +\-U {gvimrc} Использовать команды из файла сценария {gvimrc} для настройки графического интерфейса. Все остальные файлы настроек для графического интерфейса пропускаются. Чтобы избежать использования сценариев настроек графического интерфейса вообще, можно использовать имя "NONE". См. ":help gui-init". .TP --V +\-V "Болтливый" режим. Выводить сообщения о том, какие файлы читаются, и о чтении-записи файла viminfo. .TP --v +\-v Запустить .B Vim в режиме Vi, как будто исполняемый файл имеет имя "vi". Имеет смысл только если исполняемый файл имеет имя "ex". .TP --w {scriptout} +\-w {scriptout} Все символы, введённые с клавиатуры вплоть до момента завершения работы, записываются в файл {scriptout}. Удобно в том случае, когда вы хотите создать файл сценария для последующего -использования с "vim -s" или ":source!". Если файл {scriptout} уже существует, +использования с "vim \-s" или ":source!". Если файл {scriptout} уже существует, то новые символы будут добавляются в конец файла. .TP --W {scriptout} -Как "-w", но уже существующий файл будет перезаписан. +\-W {scriptout} +Как "\-w", но уже существующий файл будет перезаписан. .TP --x +\-x Шифровать записываемые файлы. Будет выдано приглашение ввести пароль. .TP --X +\-X Не подключаться к X-серверу. Ускоряет загрузку на консоли, но делает невозможным использование заголовка окна и буфера обмена. .TP --Z +\-Z Ограниченный режим. Работает так же, как и программы, начинающиеся с "r". .TP --- +\-\- Конец ключей. Все остальные аргументы рассматриваются как имена файлов. Может быть использовано для правки файлов, имена которых начинаются с дефиса. .TP ---help -Вывести краткую справку и завершить работу. То же, что и "-h". +\-\-help +Вывести краткую справку и завершить работу. То же, что и "\-h". .TP ---version +\-\-version Вывести информацию о версии программы и завершить работу. .TP ---remote +\-\-remote Подключиться к серверу Vim и заставить его править файлы, указанные в последующих аргументах. Если сервер не найден, выводится предупреждение, а файлы правятся в местной копии Vim. .TP ---remote-expr {выражение} +\-\-remote\-expr {выражение} Подключиться к серверу Vim и вычислить на нём указанное {выражение}. Результат вычисления будет выведен в поток стандартного вывода (stdout). .TP ---remote-send {ключи} +\-\-remote\-send {ключи} Подключиться к серверу Vim и передать ему указанные {ключи}. .TP ---remote-silent -Как "--remote", но без вывода предупреждения, если сервер не найден. +\-\-remote\-silent +Как "\-\-remote", но без вывода предупреждения, если сервер не найден. .TP ---remote-wait -Как "--remote", но Vim не будет завершать работу до тех пор, пока не будет +\-\-remote\-wait +Как "\-\-remote", но Vim не будет завершать работу до тех пор, пока не будет выполнена правка всех файлов. .TP ---remote-wait-silent -Как "--remote-wait", но без вывода предупреждения, если сервер не найден. +\-\-remote\-wait\-silent +Как "\-\-remote\-wait", но без вывода предупреждения, если сервер не найден. .TP ---serverlist +\-\-serverlist Вывести список всех доступных серверов Vim. .TP ---servername {имя} +\-\-servername {имя} Использовать указанное {имя} в качестве имени сервера. Если ключ -"--remote" не указан, то {имя} присваивается данной копии Vim, +"\-\-remote" не указан, то {имя} присваивается данной копии Vim, в противном случае указывает на имя сервера, к которому следует подключиться. .TP ---socketid {id} +\-\-socketid {id} Только для графического интерфейса GTK: использовать механизм GtkPlug для запуска gvim в отдельном окне. .TP ---echo-wid +\-\-echo\-wid Только для графического интерфейса GTK: вывести идентификатор окна (Window ID) в поток стандартного вывода (stdout). .SH ВСТРОЕННАЯ СПРАВКА diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1 b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1 index 8341b5044..494812675 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1 @@ -1,18 +1,18 @@ .TH VIMDIFF 1 "30 mars 2001" .SH NOM -vimdiff \- ouvre deux ou trois versions d'un fichier dans Vim et affiche -leurs diffrences +vimdiff \- ouvre deux, trois ou quatre versions d'un fichier dans Vim et +affiche leurs diffrences .SH SYNOPSIS .br .B vimdiff -[options] fichier1 fichier2 [fichier3] +[options] fichier1 fichier2 [fichier3 [fichier4]] .PP .B gvimdiff .SH DESCRIPTION .B Vimdiff dmarre .B Vim -avec deux (ou trois) fichiers. +avec deux (ou trois ou quatre) fichiers. Chaque fichier est ouvert dans sa propre fentre. Les diffrences entres ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance. C'est un outil trs pratique pour visualiser et reporter les diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1 index 5f09ee4b7..d143588cd 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1 @@ -1,18 +1,18 @@ .TH VIMDIFF 1 "30 mars 2001" .SH NOM -vimdiff \- ouvre deux ou trois versions d'un fichier dans Vim et affiche -leurs différences +vimdiff \- ouvre deux, trois ou quatre versions d'un fichier dans Vim et +affiche leurs différences .SH SYNOPSIS .br .B vimdiff -[options] fichier1 fichier2 [fichier3] +[options] fichier1 fichier2 [fichier3 [fichier4]] .PP .B gvimdiff .SH DESCRIPTION .B Vimdiff démarre .B Vim -avec deux (ou trois) fichiers. +avec deux (ou trois ou quatre) fichiers. Chaque fichier est ouvert dans sa propre fenêtre. Les différences entres ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance. C'est un outil très pratique pour visualiser et reporter les diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-pl.1 b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-pl.1 index ac3de3f8e..5332f7832 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-pl.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-pl.1 @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ .TH VIMDIFF 1 "2001 Mar 30" .SH NAZWA -vimdiff \- edytuj dwie lub trzy wersje pliku w Vimie i zobacz rnice +vimdiff \- edytuj dwie, trzy lub cztery wersje pliku w Vimie i zobacz rnice .SH SYNOPSIS .br .B vimdiff -[opcje] plik1 plik2 [plik3] +[opcje] plik1 plik2 [plik3 [plik4]] .PP .B gvimdiff .SH OPIS .B Vimdiff uruchomi .B Vima -z dwoma (lub trzema plikami), kady z nich we wasnym oknie. +z dwoma (trzema lub czterema plikami), kady z nich we wasnym oknie. Rnice midzy plikami zostan podwietlone. Jest to dobry sposb by przeanalizowa rnice i przenie zmiany z jednej wersji pliku do innej. @@ -25,14 +25,14 @@ zostanie uruchomione GUI (jeli dostpne). W kadym oknie zostanie ustawiona opcja 'diff', ktra spowoduje podwietlenie rnic. .br -Opcje 'wrap' i 'scrollbind' zostan ustawione by tekst dobrze si -przegldao. +Opcje 'wrap' i 'scrollbind' zostan ustawione by tekst si +wygodnie przegldao. .br -Opcja 'foldmethod' zostanie ustawiona na "diff", dziki temu +Opcja 'foldmethod' zostanie ustawiona na "diff", dziki czemu niezmienione linie zostan zwinite. 'foldcolumn' bdzie rwne 2 aby atwo wyszukiwa, otwiera i zamyka zwinicia. .SH OPCJE -Pionowy podzia jest uyty do wyrwnania linii, tak jakby uyto +Pionowy podzia zostanie uyty do wyrwnania linii, tak jakby uyto opcji "\-O". Aby uzyska poziomy podzia uyj opcji "\-o". .PP Aby pozna inne opcje zobacz vim(1). diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-pl.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-pl.UTF-8.1 index 0d9186eb4..d66fdc9c0 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-pl.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-pl.UTF-8.1 @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ .TH VIMDIFF 1 "2001 Mar 30" .SH NAZWA -vimdiff \- edytuj dwie lub trzy wersje pliku w Vimie i zobacz różnice +vimdiff \- edytuj dwie, trzy lub cztery wersje pliku w Vimie i zobacz różnice .SH SYNOPSIS .br .B vimdiff -[opcje] plik1 plik2 [plik3] +[opcje] plik1 plik2 [plik3 [plik4]] .PP .B gvimdiff .SH OPIS .B Vimdiff uruchomi .B Vima -z dwoma (lub trzema plikami), każdy z nich we własnym oknie. +z dwoma (trzema lub czterema plikami), każdy z nich we własnym oknie. Różnice między plikami zostaną podświetlone. Jest to dobry sposób by przeanalizować różnice i przenieść zmiany z jednej wersji pliku do innej. @@ -25,14 +25,14 @@ zostanie uruchomione GUI (jeśli dostępne). W każdym oknie zostanie ustawiona opcja 'diff', która spowoduje podświetlenie różnic. .br -Opcje 'wrap' i 'scrollbind' zostaną ustawione by tekst dobrze się -przeglądało. +Opcje 'wrap' i 'scrollbind' zostaną ustawione by tekst się +wygodnie przeglądało. .br -Opcja 'foldmethod' zostanie ustawiona na "diff", dzięki temu +Opcja 'foldmethod' zostanie ustawiona na "diff", dzięki czemu niezmienione linie zostaną zwinięte. 'foldcolumn' będzie równe 2 aby łatwo wyszukiwać, otwierać i zamykać zwinięcia. .SH OPCJE -Pionowy podział jest użyty do wyrównania linii, tak jakby użyto +Pionowy podział zostanie użyty do wyrównania linii, tak jakby użyto opcji "\-O". Aby uzyskać poziomy podział użyj opcji "\-o". .PP Aby poznać inne opcje zobacz vim(1). diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-ru.1 b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-ru.1 index 7517f87e0..385536790 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-ru.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-ru.1 @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ vimdiff \- Vim , . .SH , - "-O". , - , "-o". + "\-O". , + , "\-o". .PP vim(1). .SH diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-ru.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-ru.UTF-8.1 index 978c90549..2f17e9c2e 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-ru.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-ru.UTF-8.1 @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ vimdiff \- позволяет редактировать две или три в находить, открывать и закрывать такие складки. .SH КЛЮЧИ ЗАПУСКА Для выравнивания строк между окнами используется вертикальное разделение окон, -как если бы использовался ключ "-O". Для того, чтобы использовать разделение -окон по горизонтали, следует указать в командной строке ключ "-o". +как если бы использовался ключ "\-O". Для того, чтобы использовать разделение +окон по горизонтали, следует указать в командной строке ключ "\-o". .PP Остальные ключи командной строки рассматриваются на странице справочника vim(1). .SH СМОТРИ ТАКЖЕ diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.1 b/runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.1 index ab5d29890..836719011 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.1 @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ vimtutor \- tutoriel Vim .SH SYNOPSIS .br -.B vimtutor [langue] +.B vimtutor [-g] [langue] .SH DESCRIPTION .B Vimtutor lance le tutoriel @@ -17,6 +17,10 @@ est utile pour les personnes souhaitant apprendre leurs premires commandes .B Vim \. .PP +L'argument optionnel -g lance vimtutor avec gvim plutt qu'avec vim, si l'IHM +graphique de vim est disponible, ou le lance avec vim si gvim n'est pas +disponible. +.PP L'argument optionnel [langue] est le nom d'une langue, spcifie par son symbole deux lettres, tels que "it" ou "es". Si l'argument [langue] est omis, la langue de la rgion linguistique actuelle sera retenue. Si le tutoriel est diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1 index a41e16311..9bf474d8f 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1 @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ vimtutor \- tutoriel Vim .SH SYNOPSIS .br -.B vimtutor [langue] +.B vimtutor [-g] [langue] .SH DESCRIPTION .B Vimtutor lance le tutoriel @@ -17,6 +17,10 @@ est utile pour les personnes souhaitant apprendre leurs premières commandes .B Vim \. .PP +L'argument optionnel -g lance vimtutor avec gvim plutôt qu'avec vim, si l'IHM +graphique de vim est disponible, ou le lance avec vim si gvim n'est pas +disponible. +.PP L'argument optionnel [langue] est le nom d'une langue, spécifiée par son symbole à deux lettres, tels que "it" ou "es". Si l'argument [langue] est omis, la langue de la région linguistique actuelle sera retenue. Si le tutoriel est diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimtutor-pl.1 b/runtime/doc/vimtutor-pl.1 index a7ac50f62..e603ca5b8 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimtutor-pl.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimtutor-pl.1 @@ -3,10 +3,10 @@ vimtutor \- nauczyciel Vima .SH SYNOPSIS .br -.B vimtutor [jzyk] +.B vimtutor -g [jzyk] .SH OPIS .B Vimtutor -uruchamia nauczycie +uruchamia nauczyciela .B Vima. Najpierw kopiuje waciwy plik, dziki temu mona go zmienia bez obaw utraty treci. @@ -15,6 +15,9 @@ utraty treci. przyda si ludziom, ktrzy chc si nauczy pierwszych polece .B Vima .PP +Opcjonalny argument \-g uruchamia vimtutor w gvimie a nie w Vimie jeli +graficzna wersja Vima jest dostpna, jeli nie zostanie uruchomiony Vim. +.PP Opcjonalny argument [jzyk] jest dwu literowym kodem jzyka, tak jak "it" lub "es". Jeli brak argumentu [jzyk] zostanie uyty jzyk biecej @@ -26,7 +29,7 @@ wypadku zostanie wykorzystana wersja angielska. jest uruchamiany zawsze w trybie kompatybilnoci z Vi .SH PLIKI .TP 15 -/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor[.languague] +/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor[.jzyk] Tekstowe pliki .B Vimtutora. .TP 15 @@ -35,7 +38,7 @@ Skrypt Vima uywany do kopiowania pliku .B Vimtutora. .SH AUTOR .B Vimtutor -zosta pocztkowo napisany dla Vim przez Michaela C. Pierce'a +zosta pocztkowo napisany dla Vi przez Michaela C. Pierce'a i Roberta K. Ware'a z Colorado School of Mines zainspirowani przez Charlesa Smitha z Colorado State University. E-mail: bware@mines.colorado.edu diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimtutor-pl.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/vimtutor-pl.UTF-8.1 index 78ee1be63..199fcd0e8 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimtutor-pl.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimtutor-pl.UTF-8.1 @@ -3,10 +3,10 @@ vimtutor \- nauczyciel Vima .SH SYNOPSIS .br -.B vimtutor [język] +.B vimtutor -g [język] .SH OPIS .B Vimtutor -uruchamia nauczycie +uruchamia nauczyciela .B Vima. Najpierw kopiuje właściwy plik, dzięki temu można go zmieniać bez obaw utraty treści. @@ -15,6 +15,9 @@ utraty treści. przyda się ludziom, którzy chcą się nauczyć pierwszych poleceń .B Vima .PP +Opcjonalny argument \-g uruchamia vimtutor w gvimie a nie w Vimie jeśli +graficzna wersja Vima jest dostępna, jeśli nie zostanie uruchomiony Vim. +.PP Opcjonalny argument [język] jest dwu literowym kodem języka, tak jak "it" lub "es". Jeśli brak argumentu [język] zostanie użyty język bieżącej @@ -26,7 +29,7 @@ wypadku zostanie wykorzystana wersja angielska. jest uruchamiany zawsze w trybie kompatybilności z Vi .SH PLIKI .TP 15 -/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor[.languague] +/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor[.język] Tekstowe pliki .B Vimtutora. .TP 15 @@ -35,7 +38,7 @@ Skrypt Vima używany do kopiowania pliku .B Vimtutora. .SH AUTOR .B Vimtutor -został początkowo napisany dla Vim przez Michaela C. Pierce'a +został początkowo napisany dla Vi przez Michaela C. Pierce'a i Roberta K. Ware'a z Colorado School of Mines zainspirowani przez Charlesa Smitha z Colorado State University. E-mail: bware@mines.colorado.edu diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimtutor.1 b/runtime/doc/vimtutor.1 index 12bde7e48..0aa7e8d8d 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimtutor.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/vimtutor.1 @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ vimtutor \- the Vim tutor .SH SYNOPSIS .br -.B vimtutor [-g] [language] +.B vimtutor [\-g] [language] .SH DESCRIPTION .B Vimtutor starts the @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ is useful for people that want to learn their first .B Vim commands. .PP -The optional argument -g starts vimtutor with gvim rather than vim, if the +The optional argument \-g starts vimtutor with gvim rather than vim, if the GUI version of vim is available, or falls back to Vim if gvim is not found. .PP The optional [language] argument is the two-letter name of a language, like diff --git a/runtime/doc/vimtutor.man b/runtime/doc/vimtutor.man index 6399d23b5..9f2350a0a 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/vimtutor.man +++ b/runtime/doc/vimtutor.man @@ -37,9 +37,9 @@ FILES AUTHOR The Vimtutor was originally written for Vi by Michael C. Pierce and Robert K. Ware, Colorado School of Mines using ideas supplied by - Charles Smith, Colorado State University. E-mail: bware@mines.col- + Charles Smith, Colorado State University. E-mail: bware@mines.col‐ orado.edu. - It was modified for Vim by Bram Moolenaar. For the names of the trans- + It was modified for Vim by Bram Moolenaar. For the names of the trans‐ lators see the tutor files. SEE ALSO diff --git a/runtime/doc/visual.txt b/runtime/doc/visual.txt index e817f0908..c04db4a0e 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/visual.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/visual.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*visual.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2006 Sep 26 +*visual.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Oct 14 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ The objects that can be used are: i[ inner [] block |v_i[| Additionally the following commands can be used: - : start ex command for highlighted lines (1) |v_:| + : start Ex command for highlighted lines (1) |v_:| r change (4) |v_r| s change |v_s| C change (2)(4) |v_C| @@ -309,8 +309,6 @@ The block is shifted by 'shiftwidth'. The RHS of the block is irrelevant. The LHS of the block determines the point from which to apply a right shift, and padding includes TABs optimally according to 'ts' and 'et'. The LHS of the block determines the point upto which to shift left. - Note: v_< padding is buggy if the Visual Block starts and ends in the same - TAB. (Vim 5.4c) See |v_b_>_example|. See |v_b_<_example|. @@ -465,6 +463,10 @@ work both in Visual mode and in Select mode. When these are used in Select mode Vim automatically switches to Visual mode, so that the same behavior as in Visual mode is effective. If you don't want this use |:xmap| or |:smap|. +Users will expect printable characters to replace the selected area. +Therefore avoid mapping printable characters in Select mode. Or use +|:sunmap| after |:map| and |:vmap| to remove it for Select mode. + After the mapping or menu finishes, the selection is enabled again and Select mode entered, unless the selected area was deleted, another buffer became the current one or the window layout was changed. diff --git a/runtime/doc/windows.txt b/runtime/doc/windows.txt index b1d81a3c1..040bc88d5 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/windows.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/windows.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -*windows.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2008 Aug 09 +*windows.txt* For Vim version 7.2. Last change: 2009 Sep 23 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar @@ -35,6 +35,11 @@ disabled at compile time} ============================================================================== 1. Introduction *windows-intro* *window* +Summary: + A buffer is the in-memory text of a file. + A window is a viewport on a buffer. + A tab page is a collection of windows. + A window is a viewport onto a buffer. You can use multiple windows on one buffer, or several windows on different buffers. @@ -342,13 +347,13 @@ CTRL-W CTRL-W Without count: move cursor to window below/right of the top-left window. With count: go to Nth window (windows are numbered from top-left to bottom-right). To obtain the window number see - |bufwinnr()| and |winnr()|. + |bufwinnr()| and |winnr()|. When N is larger than the number + of windows go to the last window. *CTRL-W_W* CTRL-W W Without count: move cursor to window above/left of current one. If there is no window above or left, go to bottom-right - window. With count: go to Nth window (windows are numbered - from top-left to bottom-right). + window. With count: go to Nth window, like with CTRL-W w. CTRL-W t *CTRL-W_t* *CTRL-W_CTRL-T* CTRL-W CTRL-T Move cursor to top-left window. @@ -1175,7 +1180,8 @@ scratch Contains text that can be discarded at any time. It is kept :setlocal buftype=nofile :setlocal bufhidden=hide :setlocal noswapfile -< The buffer name can be used to identify the buffer. +< The buffer name can be used to identify the buffer, if you + give it a meaningful name. *unlisted-buffer* unlisted The buffer is not in the buffer list. It is not used for diff --git a/runtime/doc/xxd-fr.1 b/runtime/doc/xxd-fr.1 index dfbc29103..0b25da437 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/xxd-fr.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/xxd-fr.1 @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ aux positions dans le fichier donnes dans le code hexadcimal. Dbute au .RI < dcalage > absolu ou relatif dans fichier_entree. -\fI+ fRindique que le dcalage est relatif la position courante dans +\fI+ \fRindique que le dcalage est relatif la position courante dans l'entre standard (sans effet si la lecture n'a pas lieu sur l'entre standard). \fI\- \fRindique un dcalage en caractres depuis la fin de l'entre (utilis avec \fI+\fR, dsigne la position avant la position @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Convertir le fichier de l'exemple prcdent avec la fonctionnalit "autoskip". .PP Crer un fichier d'un octet, contenant seulement le caractre 'A'. Les nombres aprs '\-r \-s' s'ajoutent au numros de lignes trouves dans le -fichier ; XXX in effects, les octets initiaux sont supprims. +fichier ; les octets initiaux sont supprims. .br \fI% echo '010000: 41' | xxd \-r \-s \-0x10000 \> fichier\fR .PP diff --git a/runtime/doc/xxd-fr.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/xxd-fr.UTF-8.1 index 7bdb655ba..9fc47d3ac 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/xxd-fr.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/xxd-fr.UTF-8.1 @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ aux positions dans le fichier données dans le code hexadécimal. Débute au .RI < décalage > absolu ou relatif dans fichier_entree. -\fI+ fRindique que le décalage est relatif à la position courante dans +\fI+ \fRindique que le décalage est relatif à la position courante dans l'entrée standard (sans effet si la lecture n'a pas lieu sur l'entrée standard). \fI\- \fRindique un décalage en caractères depuis la fin de l'entrée (utilisé avec \fI+\fR, désigne la position avant la position @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Convertir le fichier de l'exemple précédent avec la fonctionnalité "autoskip" .PP Créer un fichier d'un octet, contenant seulement le caractère 'A'. Les nombres après '\-r \-s' s'ajoutent au numéros de lignes trouvées dans le -fichier ; XXX in effects, les octets initiaux sont supprimés. +fichier ; les octets initiaux sont supprimés. .br \fI% echo '010000: 41' | xxd \-r \-s \-0x10000 \> fichier\fR .PP diff --git a/runtime/doc/xxd-pl.1 b/runtime/doc/xxd-pl.1 index 00cbbffee..d9fa9be20 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/xxd-pl.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/xxd-pl.1 @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ \-r[evert] [opcje] [plik_we [plik_wy]] .SH OPIS .I xxd -tworzy zrzut heksowy podanego pliku na standardowe wyjcie. +tworzy zrzut heksowy podanego pliku lub standardowego wejcia. Moe take przetworzy zrzut heksowy z powrotem do oryginalnej, binarnej formy. Podobnie jak @@ -27,13 +27,13 @@ i .BR uudecode (1) pozwala na przekazanie danych binarnych w bezpiecznej w poczcie formie ASCII, ale ma zalety dekodowania na standardowe wyjcie. -Ponadto mona go uy do przeprowadzenia atania plikw binarnych. +Ponadto mona go uy do binarnego atania plikw. .SH OPCJE Jeli nie podano .I plik_we -xxd czyta ze standardowego wejcie. +xxd czyta ze standardowego wejcia. Jeli okrelono -.I plik_wy +.I plik_we jako znak .RB \` \- ' wtedy dane wejciowe czytane s ze standardowego wejcia. @@ -63,9 +63,9 @@ wyczone. .TP .IR \-b " | " \-bits Przecza do zrzutu bitowego (cyfr binarnych) zamiast heksowego. -Opcja ta zapisuje oktety ajko osiem cyfr 1 lub 0 zamias normalnego +Opcja ta zapisuje oktety jako osiem cyfr 1 lub 0 zamiast normalnego zrzutu heksowego. Kada linia jest poprzedzona przez -heksadecymalny numer linii a za nim jego reprezentacja w ascii (lub +heksadecymalny numer linii a po nim jego reprezentacj w ascii (lub ebcdic). Opcje linii polece \-r, \-p, \-i nie dziaaj w tym trybie. .TP @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ nie czyta ze standardowego wejcia. .TP .IR "\-l len " | "\-len len" zakocz po wypisaniu -.RI < len> +.RI < len > oktetw. .TP .IR \-p " | " \-ps " | " \-postscript " | " \-plain @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ bez obcinania go. Uyj kombinacji .I \-r \-p by odczyta zwyky zrzut heksadecymalny bez numerw linii i okrelonego ukadu kolumn. Dodatkowe biae znaki i amanie wierszy -s dozwolone wszdzie. +s wszdzie dozwolone. .TP .I \-seek offset Kiedy uyty po @@ -129,11 +129,11 @@ dodanym do pozycji w pliku odnalezionym w zrzucie heksowym. .I \-s [+][\-]seek zaczyna na .RI < seek > -bajtw abs. (lub wzg.) offsecie pliku wejciowego. -\fI+ fRwskazuje, e seek jest wzgldne do biecej pozycji pliku (bez +bajtw bezwgldnego (lub wzgldnego) offsetu pliku wejciowego. +\fI+ \fRwskazuje, e seek jest wzgldne do biecej pozycji pliku (bez znaczenia jeli nie wczytuje ze standardowego wejcia). \fI\- \fRwskazuje e seek powinno by o tyle znakw od koca wejcia (lub jeli -poczone z \fI+\fR: przezhd biec pozycj pliku na standardowym +poczone z \fI+\fR: przed biec pozycj pliku na standardowym wejciu). Bez opcji \-s xxd zaczyna od biecej pozycji w pliku. .TP @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ pozycj. Jeli plik wyjciowy nie jest moliwy do przeszukania moliwe s tylko przerwy, ktre zostan wypenione bajtami null. .PP .I xxd \-r -nigdy nie podaje bdw analizy. mieci s ignorowane. +nigdy nie podaje bdw analizy. mieci s po cichu ignorowane. .PP W czasie edycji zrzutw heksowych, prosz zauway e .I xxd \-r @@ -161,8 +161,8 @@ pomija wszystko w linii wejcia po odczytaniu wystarczajcej iloci kolumn danych heksadecymalnych (zobacz opcj \-c). Oznacza to take, e zmiany w drukowanych kolumnach ascii (lub ebcdic) s zawsze ignorowane. Odwrcenie zwykego (lub postscriptowego) stylu zrzutu -poprzez xxd \-r \-p nie zaley od kolejnoci kolumn. Tutaj cokolwiej -co wyglda jak para cyfr heks jest interpretowane. +poprzez xxd \-r \-p nie zaley od kolejnoci kolumn. Tutaj cokolwiek +co wyglda jak para znakw heks jest interpretowane. .PP Zauwa rnic midzy .br @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ i .I xxd \-s \+seek moe by rne od .IR "xxd \-s seek" , -poniewa lseek(2) jest uyty do "przewinicie" wejcia. '+' robi +poniewa lseek(2) jest uyty do "przewinicie" wejcia. '+' stanowi rnic jeli rdem wejcia jest standardowe wejcie i jeli pozycja w pliku ze standardowego wejcia nie jest pocztkiem pliku w chwili uruchomienia xxd. Nastpujce przykady mog wyjani (lub bardziej @@ -184,17 +184,17 @@ zmyli!)... Przewi standardowe wejcie przed przeczytaniem; potrzebne poniewa `cat' ju odczyta do koca standardowego wejcia. .br -\fI% sh \-c 'cat > zwyka_kopia; xxd \-s 0 > hex_kopia' < plik +\fI% sh \-c 'cat > zwyka_kopia; xxd \-s 0 > hex_kopia' < plik\fR .PP Zrzut heksowy od pozycji pliku 0x480 (=1024+128) w przd. Znak `+' oznacza "wzgldny wobec biecej pozycji", std `128' dodaje do 1k gdzie zakoczy dd. .br -\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +128 > hex_snippet' < file +\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +128 > hex_snippet' < file\fR .PP Zrzut heksowy od pozycji pliku 0x100 ( = 1024\-768) dalej. .br -\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +-768 > hex_snippet' < file +\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +-768 > hex_snippet' < file\fR .PP Jakkolwiek, jest to rzadka sytuacja i uycie `+' jest rzadko potrzebne. @@ -206,14 +206,14 @@ Wypisz wszystko z wyjtkiem pierwszych trzech linii (heksowe 0x30 bajtw) .B pliku \. .br -\fI% xxd \-s 0x30 plik +\fI% xxd \-s 0x30 plik\fR .PP .br Wypisz trzy linie (heksowe 0x30 bajtw) z koca .B pliku \. .br -\fI% xxd \-s \-0x30 plik +\fI% xxd \-s \-0x30 plik\fR .PP .br Wypisz 120 bajtw jako cigy zrzut heksowy z 20 oktetami na lini. diff --git a/runtime/doc/xxd-pl.UTF-8.1 b/runtime/doc/xxd-pl.UTF-8.1 index 669ffc2ea..e63ce64b7 100644 --- a/runtime/doc/xxd-pl.UTF-8.1 +++ b/runtime/doc/xxd-pl.UTF-8.1 @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ \-r[evert] [opcje] [plik_we [plik_wy]] .SH OPIS .I xxd -tworzy zrzut heksowy podanego pliku na standardowe wyjście. +tworzy zrzut heksowy podanego pliku lub standardowego wejścia. Może także przetworzyć zrzut heksowy z powrotem do oryginalnej, binarnej formy. Podobnie jak @@ -27,13 +27,13 @@ i .BR uudecode (1) pozwala na przekazanie danych binarnych w bezpiecznej w poczcie formie ASCII, ale ma zalety dekodowania na standardowe wyjście. -Ponadto można go użyć do przeprowadzenia łatania plików binarnych. +Ponadto można go użyć do binarnego łatania plików. .SH OPCJE Jeśli nie podano .I plik_we -xxd czyta ze standardowego wejście. +xxd czyta ze standardowego wejścia. Jeśli określono -.I plik_wy +.I plik_we jako znak .RB \` \- ' wtedy dane wejściowe czytane są ze standardowego wejścia. @@ -63,9 +63,9 @@ wyłączone. .TP .IR \-b " | " \-bits Przełącza do zrzutu bitowego (cyfr binarnych) zamiast heksowego. -Opcja ta zapisuje oktety ajko osiem cyfr 1 lub 0 zamias normalnego +Opcja ta zapisuje oktety jako osiem cyfr 1 lub 0 zamiast normalnego zrzutu heksowego. Każda linia jest poprzedzona przez -heksadecymalny numer linii a za nim jego reprezentacja w ascii (lub +heksadecymalny numer linii a po nim jego reprezentacją w ascii (lub ebcdic). Opcje linii poleceń \-r, \-p, \-i nie działają w tym trybie. .TP @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ nie czyta ze standardowego wejścia. .TP .IR "\-l len " | "\-len len" zakończ po wypisaniu -.RI < len> +.RI < len > oktetów. .TP .IR \-p " | " \-ps " | " \-postscript " | " \-plain @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ bez obcinania go. Użyj kombinacji .I \-r \-p by odczytać zwykły zrzut heksadecymalny bez numerów linii i określonego układu kolumn. Dodatkowe białe znaki i łamanie wierszy -są dozwolone wszędzie. +są wszędzie dozwolone. .TP .I \-seek offset Kiedy użyty po @@ -129,11 +129,11 @@ dodanym do pozycji w pliku odnalezionym w zrzucie heksowym. .I \-s [+][\-]seek zaczyna na .RI < seek > -bajtów abs. (lub wzg.) offsecie pliku wejściowego. -\fI+ fRwskazuje, że seek jest względne do bieżącej pozycji pliku (bez +bajtów bezwględnego (lub względnego) offsetu pliku wejściowego. +\fI+ \fRwskazuje, że seek jest względne do bieżącej pozycji pliku (bez znaczenia jeśli nie wczytuje ze standardowego wejścia). \fI\- \fRwskazuje że seek powinno być o tyle znaków od końca wejścia (lub jeśli -połączone z \fI+\fR: przezhd bieżącą pozycją pliku na standardowym +połączone z \fI+\fR: przed bieżącą pozycją pliku na standardowym wejściu). Bez opcji \-s xxd zaczyna od bieżącej pozycji w pliku. .TP @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ pozycję. Jeśli plik wyjściowy nie jest możliwy do przeszukania możliwe są tylko przerwy, które zostaną wypełnione bajtami null. .PP .I xxd \-r -nigdy nie podaje błędów analizy. Śmieci są ignorowane. +nigdy nie podaje błędów analizy. Śmieci są po cichu ignorowane. .PP W czasie edycji zrzutów heksowych, proszę zauważyć że .I xxd \-r @@ -161,8 +161,8 @@ pomija wszystko w linii wejścia po odczytaniu wystarczającej ilości kolumn danych heksadecymalnych (zobacz opcję \-c). Oznacza to także, że zmiany w drukowanych kolumnach ascii (lub ebcdic) są zawsze ignorowane. Odwrócenie zwykłego (lub postscriptowego) stylu zrzutu -poprzez xxd \-r \-p nie zależy od kolejności kolumn. Tutaj cokolwiej -co wygląda jak para cyfr heks jest interpretowane. +poprzez xxd \-r \-p nie zależy od kolejności kolumn. Tutaj cokolwiek +co wygląda jak para znaków heks jest interpretowane. .PP Zauważ różnicę między .br @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ i .I xxd \-s \+seek może być różne od .IR "xxd \-s seek" , -ponieważ lseek(2) jest użyty do "przewinięcie" wejścia. '+' robi +ponieważ lseek(2) jest użyty do "przewinięcie" wejścia. '+' stanowi różnicę jeśli źródłem wejścia jest standardowe wejście i jeśli pozycja w pliku ze standardowego wejścia nie jest początkiem pliku w chwili uruchomienia xxd. Następujące przykłady mogą wyjaśnić (lub bardziej @@ -184,17 +184,17 @@ zmylić!)... Przewiń standardowe wejście przed przeczytaniem; potrzebne ponieważ `cat' już odczytał do końca standardowego wejścia. .br -\fI% sh \-c 'cat > zwykła_kopia; xxd \-s 0 > hex_kopia' < plik +\fI% sh \-c 'cat > zwykła_kopia; xxd \-s 0 > hex_kopia' < plik\fR .PP Zrzut heksowy od pozycji pliku 0x480 (=1024+128) w przód. Znak `+' oznacza "względny wobec bieżącej pozycji", stąd `128' dodaje do 1k gdzie zakończył dd. .br -\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +128 > hex_snippet' < file +\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +128 > hex_snippet' < file\fR .PP Zrzut heksowy od pozycji pliku 0x100 ( = 1024\-768) dalej. .br -\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +-768 > hex_snippet' < file +\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +-768 > hex_snippet' < file\fR .PP Jakkolwiek, jest to rzadka sytuacja i użycie `+' jest rzadko potrzebne. @@ -206,14 +206,14 @@ Wypisz wszystko z wyjątkiem pierwszych trzech linii (heksowe 0x30 bajtów) .B pliku \. .br -\fI% xxd \-s 0x30 plik +\fI% xxd \-s 0x30 plik\fR .PP .br Wypisz trzy linie (heksowe 0x30 bajtów) z końca .B pliku \. .br -\fI% xxd \-s \-0x30 plik +\fI% xxd \-s \-0x30 plik\fR .PP .br Wypisz 120 bajtów jako ciągły zrzut heksowy z 20 oktetami na linię. |